Você está na página 1de 335

Contents Owner's Manual for

Vehicle

A-Z The Ultimate Driving


Machine

THE BMW 5 SERIES SEDAN.


OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


528i Owner's Manual for Vehicle
535i Thank you for choosing a BMW.
550i The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
528i xDrive
535i xDrive Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con
550i xDrive tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/11, 09 11 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic Communication
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 230 Telephone
page 324. 242 Office
251 Contacts
253 ConnectedDrive
6 Notes
Mobility
At a glance
262 Refueling
12 Cockpit
264 Fuel
16 iDrive
265 Wheels and tires
22 Voice activation system
282 Engine compartment
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
284 Engine oil
Controls 288 Maintenance
30 Opening and closing 290 Replacing components
47 Adjusting 298 Breakdown assistance
58 Transporting children safely 304 Care
62 Driving
Reference
75 Displays
310 Technical data
89 Lamps
314 Short commands of the voice activation
94 Safety
system
107 Driving stability control systems
324 Everything from A to Z
114 Driving comfort
139 Climate control
146 Interior equipment
153 Storage compartments

Driving tips
160 Things to remember when driving
163 Loading
166 Saving fuel

Navigation
172 Navigation

Entertainment
190 Tone
192 Radio
200 CD/multimedia
221 Rear entertainment

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment
The fastest way to find information on a partic This Owner's Manual describes all models and
ular topic is by using the index. all standard, country-specific and optional
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in equipment that is offered in the model series.
the first chapter. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is
also described and illustrated that is not availa
Updates made after the editorial ble in your vehicle, e.g. because of the selected
deadline optional equipment or the country-specific var
iants.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen This also applies for safety-related functions
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. and systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Additional sources of information Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple
Should you have any questions, your service mentary Owner's Manuals.
center will be glad to advise you at any time. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is arranged differently than shown in the illustra
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. tions.

Symbols Status of the Owner's Manual


Indicates precautions that must be followed The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per icy of constant development that is conceived
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
Marks the end of a specific item of informa
cases, therefore, the features described in this
tion.
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se vehicle.
lect individual functions.
... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac Updates made after the editorial
tivation system. deadline
... Identifies the answers generated by the Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
voice activation system. the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen
Refers to measures that can be taken to help dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components For your own safety


Indicates that you should consult the rele
Maintenance and repairs
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor
mation on a particular part or assembly. Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re

6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Notes

quires suitable maintenance and repair meth tomotive repair establishment or individual
ods. using any certified automotive part.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord California Proposition 65 Warning
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri California laws require us to state the following
ately trained personnel. warning:

If this work is not carried out properly, there is Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
the danger of subsequent damage and related components and parts, including components
safety hazards. found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal
Parts and Accessories ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac
contained in vehicles and certain products of
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur
component wear contain or emit chemicals
chase accessories tested and approved by
known to the State of California to cause cancer
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
performance when installed on your vehicle.
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
accept any liability for damage resulting from in
thoroughly with soap and water.
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
Service and warranty
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the We recommend that you read this publication
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod lowing warranties:
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
sional advice on using these items, are available Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
wheels, suspension components, brake dust California Emission Control System Limited
shields, telephones, including operation of any Warranty.
mobile phone from within the vehicle without Detailed information about these warranties is
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans listed in the Service and Warranty Information
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
electrical system or affect the validity of the designed to meet the particular operating con
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center ditions and homologation requirements in your
for additional information. Maintenance, re country and continental region in order to deliver
placement, or repair of the emission control de the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op
vices and systems may be performed by any au erated under those conditions. If you wish to op
erate your vehicle in another country or region,

7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Notes

you may be required to adapt your vehicle to However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
meet different prevailing operating conditions individual problems between you, your dealer,
and homologation requirements. You should or BMW of North America, LLC.
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
such case, please contact Customer Relations (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe
for further information. rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Maintenance You can also obtain other information about mo
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi
cle Limited Warranty. For Canadian customers
Specifications for required maintenance meas Canadian customers who wish to report a
ures: safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De
BMW Maintenance system fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
Service and Warranty Information Booklet
also obtain other information about motor vehi
for US models
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War
ranty.

Reporting safety defects


For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.

8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Notes

9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
All standard, country-specific and optional ment or country variant. This also applies for
equipment that is offered in the model series is safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

All around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort functions Active Blind Spot Detec


Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem tion104
ory54
Collision warning120
Active seat49
Lane departure warning102

2 Roller sunblinds44
3 Rear window safety switch44 Night Vision with pedestrian de
tection134
4 Power windows43
5 Exterior mirror operation55 Head-up Display137
6 Driver assistance systems

7 Lamps

12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Cockpit At a glance

Front fog lamps93 Increase distance116

Parking lamps89 Reduce distance116

Low beams89 10 Instrument cluster75


11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Automatic headlamp con Entertainment source
trol90
Daytime running lights90
Volume
Adaptive light control91
High-beam Assistant91
Voice activation22
Instrument lighting93

Telephone230
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal69
12 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers69
High beams, head
lamp flasher69
Rain sensor70
High-beam Assistant91

Clean the windshields and head


Roadside parking lamps91
lamps69

Computer84 13 Start/stop the engine and switch


the ignition on/off63

Automatic Engine Start/Stop


9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Function64
Store speed121114
14 Horn

Resume speed123116 15 Steering wheel heating57

Cruise control on/off, interrupt 16 Adjust the steering wheel57


ing114

Cruise control on/off, interrupt 17 Open the trunk lid38


ing122

18 Unlocking the hood

13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance Cockpit

All around the center console

1 Headliner15 10 PDC Park Distance Control123


2 Control Display16 Top View128
3 Glove compartment153 Backup camera126
4 Air vent142 Parking assistant131
5 Hazard warning system298 Side View130

Central locking system37 HDC Hill Descent Control109

6 Radio192 11 Dynamic Driving Control111


CD/Multimedia200
7 Automatic climate control139 DSC Dynamic Stability Con
8 Controller with buttons16 trol107
9 Parking brake66
12 Transmission selector lever

Auto Hold67

14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Cockpit At a glance

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request298 4 Reading lamps93

2 Glass sunroof, powered45 5 Interior lamps93

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger


airbag96

15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance iDrive

iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control Display

All standard, country-specific and optional Notes


equipment that is offered in the model series is
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
instructions.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip Do not place objects close to the Control
ment or country variant. This also applies for Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
safety-related functions and systems. be damaged.

Switching off
The concept
1. Press the button.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
2. "Switch off control display"
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf
fic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Switching on


Press the controller again to switch the screen
Controls back on.

Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.

16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
iDrive At a glance

2. Press. Operating concept


Opening the main menu
Press the button.

3. Move in four directions.

The main menu is displayed.


All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.

Selecting menu items


Menu items shown in white can be selected.

Buttons on controller 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu


item is highlighted.
Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimedia


menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation


menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone 2. Press the controller.


menu.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
BACK Displays the previous
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
panel.
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
OPTION Opens the Options menu. "Settings".

Changing between panels


After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Move the controller to the left.

17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance iDrive

The current panel is closed and the previous Additional options: move the controller to the
panel is displayed. right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis
The previous panel is opened again by played.
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed. Options menu
Move the controller to the right. The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
A new panel is opened on top of the previous Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
display. This area remains unchanged.
Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu


When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
Press the menu button on the controller 3. Press the controller.
twice.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Opening the Options menu
Several menu items are preceded by a check
Press the button. box. It indicates whether the function is acti
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
The "Options" menu is displayed. activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.

18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
iDrive At a glance

Example: setting the clock 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
Setting the clock 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high Status information
lighted, and then press the controller.
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta
tus field at the top right:
Time.
Current entertainment source.
Sound output, on/off.
Wireless network reception strength.
Telephone status.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left Traffic bulletin reception.
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high Status field symbols
lighted, and then press the controller. The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins are switched on.

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high Telephone symbols


lighted, and then press the controller.
Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception


strength Symbol flashes: searching
for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance iDrive

Symbol Meaning In the divided screen view, the so-called split


screen, this information remains visible even
Roaming is active. when you change to another menu.
Text message was received.
Switching the split screen on and off
Check the SIM card.
1. Press the button.
SIM card is blocked.
2. "Split screen"
SIM card is missing.
Selecting the display
Enter the PIN.

1. Press the button.


Entertainment symbols 2. "Split screen"

Symbol Meaning 3. Move the controller until the split screen is


selected.
CD/DVD player. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
Music collection. content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

Rear AUX-IN port on the left.

Rear AUX-IN port on the right.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning Programmable memory


buttons
Spoken instructions are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi General information


tion. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro
grammable memory buttons and called up di
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
Split screen menu.
General information The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Saving a function
from the computer.
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
iDrive At a glance

3. "OK": confirm the entry.


2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds. Symbol Function

Running a function Press the controller: delete the letter


or number.
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This Press the controller for an extended
means, for example, that the number is dialed period: delete all letters or numbers.
when a phone number is selected. Enter a blank space.

Displaying the button assignment Switching between letters and


Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear numbers
gloves or use objects. Depending on the menu, you can switch be
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge tween entering letters and numbers:
of the screen.
Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower


case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be
tween entering upper and lower case letters:
To display short information: touch the but Symbol Function
ton.
Move the controller up: switch
To display detailed information: touch the from upper to lower case letters.
button for an extended period.
Move the controller up: switch
Deleting the button assignments from lower to upper case letters.
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds. Entry comparison
2. "OK" Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Entering letters and numbers The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
General information
Only those letters are offered during the en
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num try for which data is available.
bers.
Destination search: town/city names can be
2. Select additional letters or numbers if entered using the spelling of language avail
needed. able on the Control Display.

21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance Voice activation system

Voice activation system


Vehicle equipment 2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is The command is displayed in the instrument
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment cluster.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, This symbol in the instrument cluster indi
e. g., because of the selected optional equip cates that the voice activation system is active.
ment or country variant. This also applies for If no other commands are available, operate the
safety-related functions and systems. function in this case via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation


The concept system
Most functions that are displayed on the Briefly press the button on the steering
Control Display can be operated by spoken wheel or Cancel.
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en
tries.
Functions that can only be used when the
Possible commands
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us Most menu items on the Control Display can be
ing the voice activation system. voiced as commands.
The system uses a special microphone on The available commands depend on which
the driver's side. menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis
... Verbal instructions in the Owner's play.
Manual to use with the voice activation sys There are short commands for functions of the
tem. main menu.
Some list entries, e.g. Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation system.
Requirements Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis
played in the respective list.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
Set the language, refer to page 87.
loud for you: Voice commands
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
Using voice activation the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Activating the voice activation system Executing functions using short


commands
1. Press the button on the steering Functions on the main menu can be performed
wheel. directly by means of short commands, nearly ir

22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Voice activation system At a glance

respective of which menu item is currently se 3. "Speech mode:"


lected, e.g., Vehicle status. 4. Select the setting.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 314.

Help dialog for the voice activation


system
Calling up help dialog: Help
Additional commands for the help dialog:
Help with examples: information about the
current operating options and the most im
portant commands for them are announced.
Help with voice activation: information
about the principle of operation for the voice Adjusting the volume
activation system is announced. Turn the volume button while giving an instruc
tion until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the
Example: playing back a CD volume of other audio sources is changed.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output The volume is stored for the remote control
if necessary. currently in use.

2. Press the button on the steering


wheel. Notes on Emergency
3. C D and multimedia Requests
The medium last played is played back. Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
4. Press the button on the steering the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
wheel. unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel
5. C D track ... e.g., CD track 4. ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 298, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
Environmental conditions
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an Say the commands, numbers, and letters
nouncements from the system are issued in an smoothly and with normal volume, empha
abbreviated form. sis, and speed.
On the Control Display: Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
1. "Settings"
When selecting a radio station, use the com
2. "Language/Units" mon pronunciation of the station name:

23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance Voice activation system

Station ... e. g. Classic Radio station


Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle


Vehicle equipment Select components

All standard, country-specific and optional 1. Press the button.


equipment that is offered in the model series is
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, 3. Press the controller.
e. g., because of the selected optional equip 4. Selecting desired range:
ment or country variant. This also applies for "Quick reference"
safety-related functions and systems.
"Search by pictures"
"Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri
bed therein.

Components of the integrated Owner's


Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner's Manual
three parts, which offer various levels of infor
mation or access possibilities. Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
Quick Reference Guide
page is displayed.
Located in the Quick Reference is important in
formation for the operation of the vehicle, the Page by page without link access
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
the links.
can also be displayed during driving.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page.
Information and descriptions based on illustra Leaf back.
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward.
needed.

Owner's Manual
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
Information and descriptions can be searched temporarily selected function
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
The relevant information can be opened directly.

25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Opening during operation via iDrive Programmable memory buttons


To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu: General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro
1. Press the button or move the controller grammable memory buttons and called up di
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" rectly.
menu is displayed.
Storing
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed 2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
Executing
"Display Owner's Manual"
Press the button.
Changing between a function and the The Owner's Manual is displayed im
Owner's Manual mediately.
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the controller


to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the


function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the page


of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing


Vehicle equipment In addition, information about service require
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
All standard, country-specific and optional data in the remote control, refer to page 288.
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment Integrated key
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
Press the button on the back of the remote con
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
Driver's door.
Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.

The storage compartment contains a switch for


separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
1 Unlocking page 40.
2 Locking
3 Trunk lid Replacing the battery
4 Panic mode, headlamp courtesy delay fea
ture

General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control.
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
Profile, refer to page 31.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart
ment; see arrow 2.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

4. Insert a battery of the same type with the trol, as shown, against the marked area on the
positive side facing upwards. steering column and press the Start/Stop button
5. Press the cover closed. within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.

Take the used battery to a recycling cen


ter or to your service center.
Personal Profile
New remote controls The concept
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center. Personal Profile concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
Loss of the remote controls to suit your personal needs and preferences.
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your The settings are automatically saved in the
service center. profile currently activated.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that
Emergency detection of remote control
was last detected and called up with the re
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the mote control is used.
engine in situations such as the following:
Your personal settings will be recognized
Interference of radio transmission to remote and called up again even if the vehicle has
control by external sources. been used in the meantime by someone else
Discharged battery in the remote control. with another remote control.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at The individual settings are stored for three Per
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
the engine.
Transmitting the settings
Starting the engine in case of Your personal settings can be taken with you to
emergency detection of remote control another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
The USB interface, refer to page 153, in the
glove compartment onto a USB device.

Profile management

Opening the profiles


Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
A different profile can be called up than the one
Check Control message appears, hold the re
associated with the remote control currently in
mote control, as shown, against the marked area
use.
on the steering column and press the Start/Stop
button within 10 seconds while pressing the 1. "Settings"
brake.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote con

31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

2. "Profiles" Importing profiles


Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"

3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re
mote control currently in use.

Renaming profiles
1. "Settings"
4. USB interface, refer to page 153: "USB
2. "Profiles"
device"
The current profile is selected.
3. "Options" Open. Exporting profiles
4. "Rename current profile" Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per
sonal settings, e.g. if settings are accidentally
changed or deleted.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 153: "USB
device"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to Using the guest profile
their default values. The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
1. Switch on the ignition.
Profiles.
2. "Settings"
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
3. "Profiles" vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
The current profile is selected. profile.
4. "Options" Open. 1. "Settings"
5. "Reset current profile" 2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.

32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

4. Open "Guest". Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer


5. Create the settings. to page 134: selection of functions and type
of display.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Daytime running lights, refer to page 90:
Display profile list during start current setting.

The profile list can be displayed during each Park Distance Control PDC, refer to
start for selecting the desired profile. page 191: adjusting the signal tone volume.
Radio, refer to page 192: stored stations,
1. "Settings"
station listened to last, special settings.
2. "Profiles"
Backup camera, refer to page 126: selec
3. "Options" Open. tion of functions and type of display.
4. "Display user list at startup" Side View, refer to page 130: selection of
the display type.
Personal Profile settings Language on the Control Display, refer to
The following functions and settings can be page 87.
stored in a profile.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 102:
More information on the settings can be found last setting, on/off.
under:
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re page 104: last setting, on/off.
fer to page 120.
Triple turn signal activation, refer to
Exterior mirror position, refer to page 55. page 69.
CD/Multimedia, refer to page 200: audio Locking the vehicle, refer to page 37: after
source listened to last. a brief period or after starting to drive.
Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re
fer to page 112.
Driver's seat position, refer to page 35: au Central locking system
tomatic retrieval after unlocking.
The concept
Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20: assignment. The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
Head-up Display, refer to page 137: selec
tion, brightness and position of the display. The system simultaneously engages and re
leases the locks on the following:
Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 90: time setting. Doors.
Tone, refer to page 190: tone settings. Trunk lid.
Automatic climate control, refer to Fuel filler flap.
page 139: settings.
Operating from the outside
Steering wheel position, refer to page 57.
Via the remote control.
Navigation, refer to page 172: map views,
route criteria, voice output on/off. Via the driver's door lock.
Via the door handles.
Via the button in the trunk lid.

33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

The following takes place simultaneously when when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote then be opened from the outside.
control:
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Unlocking
the theft protection is activated/deactivated.
Press the button.
Theft protection prevents the doors from
being unlocked using the lock buttons or the The vehicle is unlocked.
door opener. Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
The welcome lamps, interior lamps and lamps are switched on.
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The alarm system, refer to page 42, is
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
armed or disarmed.
rently in use.

Operating from the inside 1. "Settings"


2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"

Via the button for the central locking system.

If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the


fuel filler flap remains unlocked. 4. Select the desired function:
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the "Driver's door only"
central locking system unlocks automatically. Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
The hazard warning system and interior lamps flap are unlocked. Pressing again un
come on. locks the entire vehicle.
"All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Opening and closing: from the
outside Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane
Using the remote control
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
General information Press and hold the button on the re
mote control.
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a The windows and the glass sunroof open.
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in Releasing the button stops the motion.
side. Always take the remote control with you

34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Locking To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do


not place the remote control into the cargo area.
Press the button on the remote control.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if Confirmation signals from the vehicle
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be 1. "Settings"
unlocked from inside without special knowl
2. "Door locks"
edge.
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma
tion signals.
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
"Flash when lock/unlock"
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.


Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
Switching on the headlamp courtesy steering wheel settings
delay feature The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
Briefly press the button on the remote wheel positions selected last are stored for the
control. currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Opening the trunk lid
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second. If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
previously locked or unlocked. damaged when the seat is moved back.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be
fore opening. When a seat position switch is pressed.

In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer
can only be opened using the remote control if ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Activating the setting
1. "Settings"

35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

2. "Door locks" Any unauthorized modifications or changes to


3. "Last seat position auto." these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un
locked with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal Locking from the outside
objects, overhead power lines, transmission Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
towers, etc. there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the unlocked from inside without special knowl
door lock using the integrated key. edge.

For US owners only Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
Commission regulations. Operation is governed the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
by the following: key.

FCC ID: In some country-specific versions, the alarm


LX8766S. system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
LX8766E.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
LX8CAS. with the remote control, or switch on the igni
LX8CAS2. tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the
MYTCAS4. remote control.
Compliance statement: In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two door lock.
conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interfer
ence, and
this device must accept any interference re
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Locking the doors and trunk lid at once Unlocking and opening
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once: Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
then pull the door handle above the armrest
the button for the central locking system in
or
the interior.
Pull the door opener twice individually on
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
senger door.
the second time opens it.
3. Lock the vehicle.
Lock the driver's door using the Automatic locking
integrated key in the door lock, or The setting is stored for the remote control cur
Press down the lock button of the front rently in use.
passenger door and close the door from
1. "Settings"
the outside.
2. "Door locks"
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control. 3. Select the desired function:
"Lock if no door is opened"
Manual operation The vehicle locks automatically after a
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock short period of time if a door is not
the vehicle using the integrated key via the door opened.
lock on the driver's door. "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Locking and unlocking

Doors
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the Automatic Soft Closing
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are
To close the doors, push lightly.
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
It is closed automatically.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

Trunk lid Danger of pinching


Make sure that the closing path of the
Opening trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Do not place the remote control in the
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be cargo area
fore opening.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
Opening from the outside
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the trunk lid.

Press the button on the remote


control for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid.
with no-touch activation, refer to page 41. The vehicle is locked completely.

Opening from the inside


Automatic tailgate operation
Push the button in the driver's footwell.
Opening
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if The trunk lid opens fully.
it is not locked.

Closing

Press the button on the exterior of the trunk


lid.
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk Press the button on the remote
lid make it easier to pull down the lid. control for approx. 1 second.

38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Push the button in the driver's foot The trunk lid closes automatically and the
well. vehicle is locked.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening procedure is likewise interrupted:
When starting the engine.
When the vehicle starts moving.
By pressing the button in the driver's foot
well.
By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.

Closing Press the button on the exterior of the trunk


lid.
Pressing again stops the motion.

The closing operation is interrupted:


When starting the engine.
The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Press the button on the inside of the trunk
lid. Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
The trunk lid closes automatically.
Take the remote control with you and do not
Pressing again stops the motion.
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.

Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, manually op
erate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and
smoothly.
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down
lightly.
With Comfort Access:
It is closed automatically.
Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the trunk lid. Danger of pinching
The trunk lid closes automatically. Make sure that the closing path is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Press the button, arrow 2.

39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

Locking separately Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.


The trunk lid can be locked separately using the Convenient closing.
switch in the front center armrest. Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
Trunk lid not secured, ar Starting the engine.
row 2.
Functional requirements
There are no external sources of interfer
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
ence nearby.
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the
central locking system. To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
red remote control can be handed out without The engine can only be started if the remote
the key. control is inside the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking Comparison with ordinary remote


control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons of the remote control or Comfort Ac
cess.

Unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area.


The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort Access
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre
The concept sponds to pressing the button.
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func
tions:

40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Locking Open trunk lid with no-touch activation


With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be
opened with no-touch activation using the re
mote control you are carrying.
A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the
center of the area at the rear of the car and the
trunk lid opens.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be
fore opening.
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second. Do not touch vehicle

This corresponds to pressing the button. With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; oth
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
erwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot
and all electronic systems and/or power con
exhaust system parts.
sumers are switched off before locking the ve
hicle. 1. Position in the center behind the vehicle.
2. Move foot in the direction of travel under
Convenient closing neath the bumper and immediately back.
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid, previously locked or unlocked.
refer to page 38.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
Do not place the remote control in the experiences interference from external sources
cargo area such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
Take the remote control with you and do not power lines, transmission towers, etc.
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
control is locked inside the vehicle when the buttons on the remote control or use the
trunk lid is closed. integrated key in the door lock.
To subsequently start the engine, hold the re
mote control against the marked area on the
steering column, refer to page 31.

41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

Alarm system In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid


can only be opened using the remote control if
The concept the vehicle was unlocked first.
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
Panic mode
Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
Press the button on the remote control
Movements in the vehicle.
for at least 3 seconds.
Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car. Switching off the alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
Interruptions in battery voltage.
With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
remote control with you, pull on the door
By sounding an acoustic alarm. handle.
By switching on the hazard warning system.
By flashing the high beams. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
Arming and disarming the alarm
system

General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control, Comfort Access or at the
door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed
at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm 2 seconds:
on some country-specific versions. The system is armed.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
with the remote control or switch on the ignition,
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
if necessary, by emergency detection of the re
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se
mote control.
cured.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote
alarm sensor are not active.
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second. The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and until the engine is started, but no longer than
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz approx. 5 minutes:
ard warning system flashes once.
An alarm has been triggered.

42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Tilt alarm sensor


The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.

Interior motion sensor


The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Opening
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the switch to the resistance
can be switched off together, such as in the fol point.
lowing situations: The window opens while the switch is held.
In automatic car washes.
In duplex garages. Press the switch beyond the resist
ance point.
During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer. The window opens automatically.
When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Pressing again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 34, via the
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and remote control.
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
Closing
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle Danger of pinching
is locked. Monitor the closing process and make
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
onds and then continues to flash. otherwise, injuries may result.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.

Power windows Pull the switch beyond the resistance


point.
General information The window closes automatically.
Take the remote control with you Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Take the remote control with you when Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, remote control.
cannot operate the power windows and injure Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Com
themselves. fort Access.

43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

Pinch protection Switching on and off


If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a Press the button.
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The LED lights up if the safety function
The window reopens slightly. is switched on.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro
tection Safety switch for rear operation

Even with the pinch protection system, check Press the safety switch when transporting
that the window's closing path is clear; other children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain if the windows are closed without supervision.
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

No window accessories Roller sun blinds


Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the General information
pinch protection system will be impaired. If you are no longer able to move the roller sun
blind for the rear window after having activated
Closing without the pinch protection it a number of times in a row, the system is
system blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat
ing. Let the system cool.
Danger of pinching
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
Monitor the closing process and make
be moved at low interior temperatures.
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.
Driver's door controls
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and


hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
Roller blind for rear window
there.
The window closes without pinch protec Press the button.
tion.

Safety switch Roller sunblinds for rear side windows


The safety switch in the driver's door can be Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
used to prevent children, for example, from it onto the bracket.
opening and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.

44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Opening and closing Controls

Do not open the window while the roller sliding visor stays completely
sunblind is raised. open.
Do not open the window while the roller sunblind
is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at Opening/closing the sliding visor
high speeds that may result in personal injury.
Press the switch in the de
sired direction to the resist
ance point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof, powered The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
General information
Press the switch in the desired direction
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
past the resistance point.
operated together or separately, using the same
switch. The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni
tion is switched on.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
Danger of pinching
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de
Monitor the closing process and make
scribed under Sliding visor.
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
Take the remote control with you sliding visor together
Take the remote control with you when Briefly press the switch twice in
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, succession in the desired direc
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves. tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.

Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the


remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with Com
fort Access.

Pinch protection system


Tilting the glass sunroof If the closing force when closing the glass sun
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move
Push switch upward briefly. ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
The closed roof is tilted and middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
the sliding visor opens tilted position during closing.
slightly. The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The

45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Opening and closing

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro The roof closes without pinch protection.
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.

Closing without the pinch protection


system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro
ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist


ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.

Initializing after a power failure


After a power failure during the opening or clos
ing process, the roof can only be operated to a
limited extent.

Initializing the system


The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Press the switch up and hold it


until the initialization is complete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the sunroof and sliding
visor are completely closed.

46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Semi-electrically adjustable seats

All standard, country-specific and optional At a glance


equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con 1 Thigh support
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
2 Tilt
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with: 3 Forward/backward

Safety belts, refer to page 51. 4 Lumbar support

Head restraints, refer to page 52. 5 Height

Airbags, refer to page 94. 6 Backrest

Tilt
Seats
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con
trol could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
rear tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en
the backrest on the front passenger side too far gages properly.
to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Adjusting

Forward/backward Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired


direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward 1 Lumbar support
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop 2 Backrest width
erly.
3 Shoulder support
4 Backrest
Height
5 Forward/back, height, tilt
6 Thigh support

Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the remote control currently in use. When the
vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
position is automatically retrieved if the Func
tion, refer to page 35, for this is activated.
Move the button in the required direction.
Adjustments in detail
Backrest 1. Forward/back.

Move the button in the required direction.

48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

2. Height. Lumbar support


The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Press the front/rear section of
the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Press the upper/lower sec
3. Seat tilt. tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.

Shoulder support

4. Backrest tilt.

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:


Results in a relaxed seating position.
Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con
5. Thigh support.
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.

49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Adjusting

Press the button. The LED lights up. 3. Select the required seat.

Front seat heating

4. Turn the controller to set the temperature


distribution.

Rear seat heating


Switching on
Press the button once for each temper
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati
cally with the temperature selected last.

Switching off
Switching on
Press the button longer.
Press the button once for each temper
The LEDs go out. ature level.
The temperature may be reduced or seat heat The maximum temperature is reached when
ing may be switched off entirely to save battery three LEDs are lit.
power.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati
Temperature distribution
cally with the temperature selected last.
The heating action in the seat cushion and back
rest can be distributed in different ways.
Switching off
1. "Climate"
Press the button longer.
2. "Seat heating distribution"
The LEDs go out.

Active seat ventilation, front


The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.

50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e. g., if the Although airbags enhance safety by providing
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous added protection, they are not a substitute for
cooling at high temperatures. safety belts.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for passen
gers sitting on the left and right.
The center rear seat belt buckle marked with
the letters CENTER is solely intended for
the center passenger.

Switching on One person per safety belt


Never allow more than one person to wear
Press the button once for each ventila
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
tion level.
children to ride on a passenger's lap.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit. Putting on the belt
If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
imum Cooling function is activated, the seat across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
ventilation automatically switches to the highest body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
level. When the Maximum Cooling function is around the hips in the lap area and does not
switched off, the unit switches to the previously press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
set level. slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im
pact and injure the abdomen.
After a short time, the system automatically
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
moves down one level in order to prevent ex
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka
cessive cooling.
ble objects, or be pinched.
Switching off Reduction of restraining effect
Press the button longer. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
The LEDs go out. belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
Safety belts safety belt may be reduced.

Seats with safety belt


The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.

Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.

51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Adjusting

Buckling the belt Front head restraints


Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the risk of injury in an accident.
belt buckle.
Height
Unbuckling the belt Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap
proximately at ear level.
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. Distance
3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
front passenger seat Active head restraint
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the severity, the active head restraint automatically
safety belts are positioned correctly. reduces the distance from the head.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac Reduced protective function
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas Do not use seat or head restraint cov
senger seat. ers.
Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
Damage to safety belts on the head restraints.
In the case of strain caused by accidents or Only attach accessories approved by BMW
damage: to the seat or head restraint.
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt Otherwise, the protective function of the active
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors head restraint will be impaired and the personal
checked. safety of the occupants will be endangered.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.

52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

Adjusting the height: manual head Distance to back of head: electrical


restraints head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the shoulder support is adjusted.

Adjusting the side extensions

To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.

Fold forward for increased lateral support in the


Adjusting the height: electrical head resting position.
restraints

Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraints


Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
Adjusting electrically. risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.

Distance to back of head: manual head Adjusting the head restraint


restraints Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap
proximately at ear level.

Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
Forward: by pulling as close as possible to the back of the head.
Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.

53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Adjusting

Adjusting the height 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro
tective function of the head restraint is unavail
able.

Seat, mirror, and steering


To raise: pull.
wheel memory
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down. General information

Folding forward Front

Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head re Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
straint forward. steering wheel positions can be stored and re
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Storing
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the


button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos The LED goes out.
sible.

54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

Calling up settings Mirrors


Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Exterior mirrors
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
At a glance
or steering wheel could result in an accident.

Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. 1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Safety mode 3 Fold in and out
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig
nition.
General information
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
the adjustment procedure is completed.
than the driver's side mirror.

Calling up of a seat position Estimating distances correctly


deactivated Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
positions is deactivated to save battery power. to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
accident.
Open or close the door or trunk lid.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
Press a button on the remote control.
mirror setting is stored for the remote control in
Press the Start/Stop button. use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved if
the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Adjusting

Storing positions Automatic heating


Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
to page 54. whenever the engine is running.

Adjusting manually Automatic dimming feature


If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
press the edges of the mirror glass. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear
view mirror, refer to page 56.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror Interior rearview mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas
senger side. This improves your view of the curb Reducing the blinding effect
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch


to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating From behind when driving at night: turn the


Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas knob.
senger's side mirror position.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
Fold in and out dimming feature
Press the button.
The concept
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
In car washes.
In narrow streets.
For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Photocells are used for control:
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
In the mirror glass.
Before entering an automatic car wash,
On the back of the mirror.
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de
pending on the width of the vehicle. Functional requirement
For proper operation:

56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Adjusting Controls

Keep the photocells clean. Storing the position


Do not cover the area between the inside Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
rearview mirror and the windshield. to page 54.

Steering wheel heating


Steering wheel
Switching on/off
General information Press the button.
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while On: the LED lights up.
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement Off: the LED goes out.
could result in an accident.

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down.


2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.

Power steering wheel adjustment

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di


rections.

57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely


Vehicle equipment tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 96.
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is Deactivating the front passenger airbags
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment If a child restraint fixing system is used in
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, the front passenger seat, the front passenger
e. g., because of the selected optional equip airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
ment or country variant. This also applies for an increased risk of injury to the child when the
safety-related functions and systems. airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.

The right place for children


Installing child restraint fixing
Note
systems
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the Before mounting
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them If the rear seat backrests are adjustable:
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
doors. return all of the rear seat backrests to the basic
position.
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place Notes
for children is in the back seat. Manufacturer's information for child re
Transporting children in the rear straint fixing systems

Only transport children younger than To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the systems, observe the information provided by
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro
accordance with the age, weight and size of the tective effect can be impaired.
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in
jury in an accident. On the front passenger seat
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a After installing a child restraint fixing system in
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint the front passenger seat, make sure that the
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their front, knee and side airbags on the front pas
age, weight and size. senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto
Children on the front passenger seat matically, refer to page 96.
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re Deactivating the front passenger airbags
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is

58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Transporting children safely Controls

an increased risk of injury to the child when the LATCH child restraint fixing
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil
Seat position and height dren.
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
Note
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and bring it up to medium height to ob Manufacturer's information for LATCH
tain the best possible position for the belt and to child restraint fixing systems
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix
dent. ing systems, observe the operating and safety
Do not change the seat position and height after information from the system manufacturer; oth
this. erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Child seat security Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors


Correctly engage the lower LATCH an
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix
ing system is resting snugly against the back
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix
The rear safety belts and the front passenger ing system, pull the belt away from the child re
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for straint fixing system.
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Without a through-loading system:
Position
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt


1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com


pletely.

59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Transporting children safely

With a through-loading system: Retaining strap guide


Position Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo


cated behind the indicated covers.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing


systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
1 Direction of travel
to the operating instructions of the system.
2 Head restraint.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop
erly connected. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
Child restraint fixing systems with a 5 Rear window shelf
tether strap
6 Seat backrest
Mounting points 7 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to


the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change the
middle head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are Guide it over the head restraint of the middle
two outer or three mounting points for child re seat.
straint fixing systems with a tether strap. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
LATCH mounting eyes
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper down.
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
6. Lower the head restraint.
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.

60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Transporting children safely Controls

Locking the doors and


windows
Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.


The door can now be opened from the outside
only.

Safety switch for the rear


Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot


be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 44.

61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Driving
Vehicle equipment When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
All standard, country-specific and optional
Shortly before the battery is discharged
equipment that is offered in the model series is
completely, so that the engine can still be
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
started.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip If the engine is switched off and the ignition
ment or country variant. This also applies for is switched on, the system automatically
safety-related functions and systems. switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off
or the daytime running lights are switched
on.
Start/Stop button
The concept Ignition off
Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop
Pressing the Start/Stop button
button again, and do not press on the brake
switches the ignition on or off and
pedal at the same time.
starts the engine.
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop
Automatic transmission: the en
button again, and do not press on the clutch
gine starts if the brake is de
pedal at the same time.
pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
Manual transmission: the engine starts if the
out.
clutch is depressed when the Start/Stop button
is pressed. To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition on
Transmission position P with the ignition
Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop
off
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time. When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at
not switched off accidentally.
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is stopped:
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of During locking, also with the low beams ac
time. tivated.

To save battery power when the engine is off, Shortly before the battery is discharged
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary completely, so that the engine can still be
electronic systems/power consumers. started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
The ignition switches off automatically:

62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

When opening and closing the driver door, if Before leaving the car with the engine running,
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the set the parking brake and place the transmission
low beams are switched off. in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if moving.
the driver's door is open and the low beams
Frequent starting in quick succession
are switched off.
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
When the ignition is switched off, by opening or
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
tive.
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state: Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
erate engine speeds.
OFF button on the radio.
When the engine is running: press START/ Manual transmission
STOP button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re Starting the engine
main ready for operation. 1. Depress the brake pedal.
Radio ready state switches off automatically: 2. Press on the clutch and shift to neutral.
After approx. 8 minutes. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
When the vehicle is locked using the central The ignition is activated automatically for a cer
locking system. tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
Shortly before the battery is discharged starts.
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. Automatic-Transmission

Starting the engine


Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
General information
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer
Enclosed areas tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
Do not let the engine run in enclosed starts.
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an Engine stop
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.
General information
Unattended vehicle
Take the remote control with you
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten Take the remote control with you when
tial source of danger. leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.

63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Set the parking brake and further secure Automatic mode


the vehicle as required The automatic engine start/stop function is op
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erational after each engine start.
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward The function is activated above a certain speed.
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi
Manual transmission: above 3 mph, approx.
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
5 km/h.
the direction of the curb.
Automatic transmission: from 5 mph, ap
prox. 9 km/h.
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car Engine stop
wash, heed the information regarding Washing
The engine is switched off automatically during
in automatic car washes, refer to page 304.
a stop under the following conditions:
Manual transmission Manual transmission:
Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
Switching off the engine not pressed.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
Start/Stop button. driver's door is closed.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. Automatic transmission:
3. Set the parking brake. The selector lever is in transmission position
D.
Automatic-Transmission The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Switching off the engine Automatic Hold.
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
hicle stopped. driver's door is closed.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced
The engine is switched off. when the engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Display in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the Au
tomatic Engine Start/Stop Func
Automatic Engine Start/Stop tion is ready for an automatic en
gine start.
Function
The concept
Note
The automatic engine start-stop function helps
The engine is not switched off automatically in
save fuel. The system switches off the engine
the following situations:
during a stop, e. g., in a traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. External temperature below approx. +37 /
The engine starts again automatically for driving +3 .
off.

64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

External temperature above approx. +95 / Note


+35 and the automatic climate control is Even if driving away was not intended, the de
operating. activated engine starts up automatically in the
The passenger compartment has not yet following situations:
been heated or cooled to the required level. Excessive warming of the passenger com
The engine is not yet at operating tempera partment when the cooling function is
ture. switched on.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer The steering wheel is turned.
ing wheel is being turned. Automatic transmission: the transmission
After driving in reverse. position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
Fogging of the windows when the automatic Automatic transmission: the transmission
climate control is switched on. position is changed from P to N, D, R, or M/
The vehicle battery charge is very low. S.

The engine compartment lid is unlocked. Automatic transmission: the accelerator and
the brake are pressed at the same time.
HDC is activated.
The vehicle begins rolling.
The parking assistant is activated.
Fogging of the windows when the automatic
Stop-and-go traffic.
climate control is switched on.

Starting the engine The vehicle battery charge is very low.

The engine starts automatically under the fol Excessive cooling of the passenger com
lowing conditions: partment when the heating is switched on.

Manual transmission: Low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur,


for example, if the brake pedal is depressed
The clutch pedal is pressed.
a number of times in succession.
Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal. Preventing an automatic engine stop
When Automatic Hold is activated: press the with automatic transmission
accelerator.
The concept
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
To make it possible to drive away very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic engine
Safety mode
stop can be actively prevented.
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of the
Preventing an engine stop using the
following conditions are met.
brake pedal
The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the The engine stop can be actively prevented
driver's door is open. within one second after the vehicle comes to a
The hood was unlocked. standstill.
The indicator lamps come on. Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
The engine can only be started via the Start/ standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
Stop button. forcefully.

65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Then press the brake pedal with normal Automatic deactivation


braking force. In certain situations, the Automatic Engine Start/
Stop Function is deactivated automatically for
Activating/deactivating the system safety reasons, such as when the driver is de
manually tected to be absent.

Using the button Malfunction


The automatic engine start/stop function no lon
ger switches of the engine automatically. A
Check Control message is displayed. It is pos
sible to continue driving. Have the system
checked.

Parking brake

Press the button. The concept


The parking brake is primarily intended to pre
LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
deactivated. brakes the rear wheels.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an


automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle Setting
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it. Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Automatic Engine Start/ The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
Stop Function is deactivated. parking brake is set.
Automatic transmission: the transmission Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
position P is engaged automatically. models
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start-/Stop button. Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward

66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

and downward inclines, further secure the vehi Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in pedal
the direction of the curb. Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
While driving set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.
Use while driving serves as an emergency brak
ing function: Automatic Hold
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled. The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
models
it is stationary.

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set. from rolling backward when driving away.

Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Manual transmission: Press the switch
while the brake or clutch is pressed.
Automatic transmission: Press the switch while
the brake is pressed or transmission position P
is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
For your safety
The parking brake is released.
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
Automatic Release in cars with
brake is set:
automatic transmission
The engine is switched off.
For automatic release, operate the accelerator
pedal. A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
Subject to the following requirements, the park
using the parking brake.
ing brake is automatically released by operation
of the accelerator pedal: The indicator lamp switches from green
Engine on. to red and the letters AUTO H go out.

Drive position engaged. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian


models
Driver buckled in and doors closed.

67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run Before driving into a car wash
ning Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. roll.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Parking
Activating The parking brake is automatically set if the en
This function can be activated when the driver's gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or held by Automatic Hold.
while driving.
The indicator lamp changes from green
Press the button. to red.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light The parking brake is not set if the engine
up. is switched off while the vehicle is coast
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti
The indicator lamp lights up. vated.
Automatic Hold is activated. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Deactivating Automatic Hold remains activated during an en


gine stop brought about by the Automatic En
Press the button again.
gine Start/Stop Function.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out. Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
Automatic Hold is deactivated. leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, cannot release the parking brake.
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake, refer to page 66, is set Malfunction
manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
matically. parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
Driving it.
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlamp flasher


headlamp flasher
Turn signal

Using turn signals

High beams, arrow 1.


Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. Washer/wiper system


To switch off manually, press the lever to the re
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
sistance point.
wipe
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
Triple turn signal activation blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
Press the lever to the resistance point. damaged.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated: Switching on
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"

Press the wiper levers up.


The lever automatically returns to its initial po
sition when released.
Normal wiping speed: press up once.
Signaling briefly The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
flash. once beyond the resistance point.

69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

The wipers switch to normal speed when the Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
vehicle is stationary. Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam
Switching off and brief wipe age could be caused by undesired wiper activa
tion.

Rain sensor sensitivity

Press the wiper levers down.


The lever automatically returns to its initial po
sition when released.
Brief wipe: press down once. Turn the thumbwheel.
To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Clean the windshield, headlamps

Rain sensor

The concept
The time between wipes is controlled automat
ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Pull the lever.


The system sprays washer fluid on the wind
shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular


intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
Press the button on the wiper lever. that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
When activated, the wipers move over the wind
reason, use antifreeze.
shield once.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.

70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Washer fluid reservoir
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
Adding washer fluid
pump.
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
Windshield washer nozzles avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
The washer jets are automatically heated when engine parts.
ever the ignition is switched on.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch off the ignition.


2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser
position. voir.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper Fill with water and if required with a washer
system must be reactivated. antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec
Fold the wipers back down ommendations.
Before switching the ignition on, fold the Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the correct mixing ratio.
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.
Manual transmission
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers Shifting
move to their resting position and are ready
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
for operation.
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad
Washer fluid vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.
General information
Reverse gear
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight
it away from sources of ignition.
resistance needs to be overcome.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.

71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Automatic transmission with Engaging the transmission position


Steptronic Transmission position P can only be disen
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
Transmission positions pedal is pressed.
With the vehicle stationary, press on the
D Drive, automatic position brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for otherwise, the shift command will not be
ward gears are available. executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv
R is Reverse ing
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres
N is Neutral sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The to start.
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to Engaging D, R and N
page 62, position P is engaged automatically.

P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio ready state, refer to page 63, or if the
ignition is switched off, refer to page 62, and
if position R or D is engaged. Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
With the ignition is off, if position N is en
gaged. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi
tion P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the Press unlock button, in order to:
resistance point at the full throttle position. Engage R.
Shift out of P.

72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving Controls

Engaging P The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate


engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Ending the sport program/manual


mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Press button P.
Shift paddles for Sport automatic
Sport program DS and manual mode M/ transmission
S

Activating sport program DS

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow


you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
mission position D. used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
The sport program of the transmission is acti If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
vated. is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
switches back into automatic mode if the selec
tor lever is in transmission position D.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans
mission position D. Shift down: pull left shift paddle.

Push the selector lever forward or backward. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is down if the engine speed is too high.
changed.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
cluster, e.g., M1.
To shift down: press the selector lever for
ward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving

Displays in the instrument cluster


The transmission position is dis
played, e.g.: P.

74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Displays
Vehicle equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
All standard, country-specific and optional ment or country variant. This also applies for
equipment that is offered in the model series is safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge80 5 Engine oil temperature80


2 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays77
3 Indicator/warning lamps78 7 Display/reset miles81
4 Tachometer80

75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

Overview, Instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Fuel gauge80 5 Engine oil temperature80


2 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays77
3 Indicator/warning lamps78 7 Display/reset miles81
4 Tachometer80

76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster

1 Miles/trip miles81 Computer84


External temperature81 2 Transmission display74
Time81 Current fuel consumption82
Date81 Energy recovery82
Range81 3 Service requirements82
Selection list, e.g., radio83 Messages, e.g. Check Control78
Navigation display172 Navigation display172

77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Messages, e.g. Check Control78 Miles/trip miles81


Time81 5 Selection list, forinstance radio83
Date81 Current fuel consumption82
2 Range81 Energy recovery82
3 Computer84 External temperature81
4 Navigation display172 6 Transmission display74
Service requirements82

Check Control Indicator/warning lamps

The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a variety of combinations and colors.
a text message may appear on the Control Dis
play.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Several of the lamps are checked for proper Symbol Function or system
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on. DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Overview: indicator/warning lamps DSC Dynamic Stability Control or


DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Symbol Function or system

Turn signal Tire Pressure Monitor


Flat Tire Monitor

Parking brake Safety belts

Parking brake in Canadian models Airbag system

Automatic Hold Steering system

Front fog lamps Emissions

High beams Emissions in Canadian models

High-beam Assistant Brake system

Parking lamps, headlamp control Brake system in Canadian models

Active Cruise Control Antilock Brake System ABS

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana


Control dian models

Cruise control At least one Check Control message


is displayed or is stored

Lane departure warning


Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control

79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

message and the meaning of the indicator and Other Check Control messages are hidden
warning lamps. automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
Supplementary text messages later.
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via Displaying stored Check Control
Check Control. messages
The supplementary text of urgent messages is 1. "Vehicle Info"
displayed on the Control Display automatically. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
Symbols
4. Select the text message.
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected. Messages after trip completion
"Owner's Manual" Special messages that are displayed during
Display additional information about the driving are displayed again after the ignition is
Check Control message in the integrated switched off.
owner's manual.
"Service request"
Contact the service partner. Fuel gauge
"Roadside Assistance" The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Notes on refueling, refer to
Hiding Check Control messages page 262.

Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is inter
rupted to protect the engine.

Press the computer button on the turn signal


lever.
Engine oil temperature
Some Check Control messages are dis
Cold engine: the pointer is at
played continuously and are not cleared un
the low temperature end.
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
Drive at moderate engine and
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
vehicle speeds.
are displayed consecutively.
Normal operating tempera
These messages can be hidden for approx.
ture: the pointer is in the mid
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis
dle or in the left half of the
played again automatically.
temperature display.

80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
perature end. A Check Control message is roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan
displayed in addition. ger of an accident.

Coolant temperature Time


Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be The time is displayed at the bot
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis tom of the instrument cluster.
played. Setting the time and time format,
Check the coolant level, refer to page 286. refer to page 86.

Odometer and trip odometer Date


Odometer, arrow 1. The date is displayed in the in
strument cluster.
Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 86.

Display/reset miles Range


Press the knob. After the reserve range is
When the ignition is switched reached:
off, the time, external temper A Check Control message is
ature and odometer are dis displayed briefly.
played.
The remaining range is
When the ignition is switched on, the trip shown on the computer.
odometer is reset.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
External temperature
The Check Control message appears continu
External temperature warning ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

If the display drops to +37 / Refuel promptly


+3 , a signal sounds. Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
A Check Control message is dis 50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and
played. damage may occur.
There is the increased danger of
ice. Displaying the cruising range
1. "Settings"
Ice on roads
2. "Info display"
Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 ,
3. "Additional indicators"
there can be a risk of ice on roads.

81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

The range is displayed in the instrument cluster. fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re
quest, refer to page 254.

Current fuel consumption Detailed information on service


Displays the current fuel con requirements
sumption. You can check More information on the scope of service re
whether you are currently driving quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
in an efficient and environmen
1. "Vehicle Info"
tally-friendly manner.
2. "Vehicle status"

Displaying the current fuel 3. "Service required"


consumption Required maintenance procedures and le
1. "Settings" gally mandated inspections are displayed.

2. "Info display" 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa


tion.
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption Symbols
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Symbols Description

No service is currently required.


Energy recovery
The energy of motion of the ve
hicle is converted to electrical en The deadline for service or a le
ergy while coasting. The vehicle gally mandated inspection is
battery is partially charged and approaching.
fuel consumption can be low
ered. The service deadline has al
ready passed.

Service requirements Entering appointment dates


Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Display
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
The driving distance or the time correctly.
to the next service is displayed
1. "Vehicle Info"
briefly after the ignition is
switched on. 2. "Vehicle status"
The current service require 3. "Service required"
ments can be read out from the remote control 4. " Vehicle inspection"
by the service specialist. 5. "Date:"
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally 6. Create the settings.
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto
matically transmitted to your service center be 7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.

82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Automatic Service Request Selection lists in the


Data regarding the maintenance status or legally instrument cluster
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto
matically transmitted to your service center be The concept
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"

The following can be operated using the buttons


Gear shift indicator and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
Current audio source.
The concept
Redial on telephone.
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
Activation of the voice activation system.
gear in the current driving situation.

Displays Activating a list and creating the


Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in setting
the instrument cluster.
Symbols Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set
Shift into neutral. ting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.

83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

Computer When destination guidance is activated in


the navigation system.
Indication in the info display
Adjusting the info display
The information from the com
You can select what information from the com
puter is shown in the Info display
puter is to be displayed on the info display of the
in the instrument cluster.
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
Calling up information on the info
display 3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
If there is only enough fuel left for less than
Press the computer button on the turn signal 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.
lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the Average fuel consumption
instrument cluster. This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
Information at a glance The average fuel consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances.
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig
nal lever calls up the following information on the
Average speed
info display:
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
Range.
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
Average fuel consumption. calculation of the average speed.
Average speed.
Date. Resetting average values
Time of arrival Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Distance to destination
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is dis
When destination guidance is activated in played if a destination is entered in the naviga
the navigation system. tion system before the trip is started.
Arrow view of navigation system The distance to the destination is adopted au
tomatically.

84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Time of arrival Applying your current speed as the


The estimated time of arrival is
limit
displayed if a destination is en 1. "Settings"
tered in the navigation system 2. "Speed"
before the trip is started. 3. "Select current speed"
The time must be correctly set. 4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
Speed limit limit.
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued. Trip computer
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be There are two types of computer.
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
5 km/h. often as necessary.
"Trip computer": the values provide an over
Displaying, setting or changing the view of the current trip.
limit
1. "Settings" Resetting the trip computer
2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Warning at:" 2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is


displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit Display on the Control Display


1. "Settings" Display the computer or trip computer on the
2. "Speed" Control Display.

3. "Warning" 1. "Vehicle Info"


4. Press the controller. 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

Resetting the fuel consumption or 3. "Time:"


speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours


are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
4. "Yes" are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Settings on the Control
Display Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
Time 2. "Time/Date"

Setting the time zone 3. "Format:"

1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired format.

2. "Time/Date" The time format is stored.

3. "Time zone"
Date
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored. Setting the date
1. "Settings"
Setting the time 2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Date:"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.

86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Displays Controls

Setting the date format Units of measure


1. "Settings"
Setting the units of measure
2. "Time/Date"
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis
3. "Format:"
tance and temperature:
4. Select the desired format.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.

The date format is stored.

Language
4. Select the desired unit.
Setting the language
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
To set the language on the Control Display: rently in use.
1. "Settings"
Brightness
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:" Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"

4. Select the desired language.


The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog


Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright
fer to page 23. ness is set.
5. Press the controller.

87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Displays

The setting is stored for the remote control cur


rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright
ness control may not be clearly visible.

88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Lamps Controls

Lamps
Vehicle equipment Parking lamps/low beams,
All standard, country-specific and optional headlamp control
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment General information
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, If the driver door is opened with the ignition
e. g., because of the selected optional equip switched off, the exterior lighting is automati
ment or country variant. This also applies for cally switched off at the following switch set
safety-related functions and systems. tings:
0, ,

At a glance Parking lamps


Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 91.
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps Low beams
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light Switch position with the ignition switched
Control , High-beam Assistant, Welcome on: the low beams light up.
lamps, daytime running lights
Welcome lamps
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
position or : the parking and interior
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un
Assistant locked.
7 Instrument lighting
8 Headlamp range control Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"

89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Lamps

3. "Welcome light" The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
The setting is stored for the remote control cur should always switch on the lamps manually un
rently in use. der these conditions.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature


Daytime running lights
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
ning lights light up in position 0, or .
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Setting the duration
1. "Settings" Activating/deactivating
2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings"
3. "Pathway light.: s" 2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"

4. Set the duration.


The setting is stored for the remote control cur The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use. rently in use.

Automatic headlamp control


Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.

90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Lamps Controls

Roadside parking lamps To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive


Light Control directs light towards the front pas
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.

Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de
pressions to increase visibility.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever Malfunction
either up or down past the resistance point for A Check Control message is displayed.
approx. 2 seconds. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos
Switching off sible.
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Headlamp range control
With halogen headlamps, the headlamp range of
Adaptive light control the low beams can be manually adjusted for the
vehicle load to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
The concept
The values following the slash apply to trailer
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
operation.
control system that enables dynamic illumina
tion of the road surface. 0 / 1 = 1 to 2 people without luggage.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa 1 / 1 = 5 people without luggage.
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows 1 / 2 = 5 people with luggage.
the course of the road. 2 / 2 = 1 person, full cargo area.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of High-beam Assistant
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed. The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys
Activating
tem automatically switches the high beams on
Switch position with the ignition switched and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor
on. on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
The turning lamps are automatically switched assistant ensures that the high beams are
on depending on the steering angle or the use switched on whenever the traffic situation al
of turn signals. lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.

91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Lamps

Activating System limits


Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations


such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
1. Turn the light switch to or .
In very unfavorable weather conditions,
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
row.
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
The indicator lamp in the instrument
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
cluster lights up.
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
When the lights are switched on, the traffic; and at animal crossings.
high beams are switched on and off automati
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
cally.
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
The system responds to light from oncoming traffic on freeways.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad
In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
ence of highly reflective signs.

Switching the high beams on and off At low speeds.


manually When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov
ered with stickers, etc.

Camera

High beams on, arrow 1.


High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press


the button on the turn signal lever. The camera is located near the base of the mir
ror.
Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in
front of the interior rear view mirror.

92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Lamps Controls

Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 90, is activated, the low beams will come 1 Interior lamps
on automatically when you switch on the front
2 Reading lamp
fog lamps.

Switching the interior lamps on and off


Instrument lighting Press the button.

Adjusting
To switch off permanently: press the button for
The parking lamps or low beams approx. 3 seconds.
must be switched on to adjust the Switch back on: press button.
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the Reading lamps
thumbwheel.
Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear


Interior lamps next to the interior lamps.
With the interior lamps shut off, the reading
General information lamps cannot be switched on.
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.

93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

Safety
Vehicle equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
All standard, country-specific and optional ment or country variant. This also applies for
equipment that is offered in the model series is safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag


2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbag

Front airbags Head airbags


Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.

94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

Protective action Never modify either the individual compo


Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end also applies to steering wheel covers, the
collisions. dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered. In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
There should be no people, animals, or ob
jects between an airbag and a person. Do not touch the individual components imme
diately after the system has been triggered; oth
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis
Keep the dashboard and window on the
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
your service center or a workshop that has the
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
attach holders such as for navigation instru
ments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un
Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
could result in injury.
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors.
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats Functional readiness of the airbag
with integrated side airbags. system
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack When the ignition is switch on, the warn
ets, over the backrests. ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
Make sure that occupants keep their heads up briefly and thereby indicates the op
away from the side airbag and do not rest erational readiness of the entire airbag system
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries and the belt tensioner.
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning
Do not remove the steering wheel. Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the air
bag cover panels, cover them or modify The warning lamp lights up continuously.
them in any way.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

When there is a malfunction, have the air less they are specifically recommended by
bag system checked immediately the manufacturer of your vehicle.
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag Do not place any electronic devices on the
system checked immediately; otherwise, there passenger seat if a child restraint system is
is a risk that the system does not function as ex to be installed on it.
pected in the event of an accident despite cor Do not place objects under the seat that
responding severity of the accident. could press against the seat from below.

Automatic deactivation of the front Indicator lamp for the front passenger
passenger airbags airbags
The system determines whether the front pas
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front The indicator lamp for the front passenger air
passenger airbags may not function properly. bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac
tivated or deactivated.
Before transporting a child on the front passen
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions The indicator lamp lights up
under Children on the front passenger seat. when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix
Malfunction of the automatic ing system intended for that
deactivation system purpose is detected on the
When transporting older children and adults, the seat or the seat is empty. The
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in airbags on the front passen
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica ger side are not activated.
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights The indicator lamp does not light up when,
up. for example, a correctly seated person of
In this case, change the sitting position so that sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
the front passenger airbags are activated and airbags on the front passenger side are ac
the indicator lamp goes out. tivated.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
Detected child seats
the person sit in the rear.
The system generally detects children seated in
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
can be evaluated correctly
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
other items to the front passenger seat un sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas

96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
child seat has been detected and the front pas more tires.
senger airbags are not activated.
Functional requirements
Strength of the driver's and front The system must have been reset when the in
passenger airbag flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
The strength with which the driver's and front signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
position of the driver's and front passenger system will operate properly. Reset the system
seats. after each correction of the tire inflation pres
To maintain the accuracy of this function over sure and after every tire or wheel change.
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control System limits
Display. Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
Calibrating the front seats external influences cannot be indicated in ad
A corresponding message appears on the Con vance.
trol Display.
The system does not operate correctly if it has
1. Move the respective seat forward all the not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
way. indicated despite correct tire inflation pres
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It sures.
moves forward briefly. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. tire:
The calibration procedure is completed when For a mounted wheel without TPM electron
the message on the Control Display disappears. ics.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat When the TPM is disturbed by other sys
the calibration. tems or devices with the same radio fre
If the message does not disappear after a repeat quency.
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible. Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
Unobstructed area of movement
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
Ensure that the area of movement of the e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The status is displayed.

The concept Status display


The tire inflation pressure is measured in the The tire and system status is indicated by the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if color of the tires.

97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

A change in the tire inflation pressure during the external temperature in the instrument clus
driving is taken into account. ter.
A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
by the TPM Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
Wheels, green tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target wheel change.
state. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
One wheel is yellow
3. "Reset"
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
All wheels are yellow 6. Drive away.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
in several tires. TPM..." is displayed.
The system was not reset after a wheel After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla
change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures are applied as set values. The re
tion pressures initialized last. setting process is completed automatically dur
A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
tem is being reset. "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
Wheels, gray drive away again, the process resumes auto
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for matically.
this may be: If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
TPM is being reset. displayed in yellow.
Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency. Low tire pressure message
Malfunction. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
For Canadian models: additional There is a flat tire or a major loss in
information tire inflation pressure.
The status display additionally shows the cur The system was not reset after a wheel
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera change and thus warns based on the infla
tures. tion pressures initialized last.
When correcting the tire inflation pressures, 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
note the following: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu
The tire pressure increases as the tire temper vers.
ature increases. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg
Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres ular tires or run-flat tires.
sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature.
Compare the displayed tire temperature with

98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

Run-flat tires, refer to page 280, are labeled 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
with a circular symbol containing the letters next opportunity.
RSC marked on the tire sidewall. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
Do not continue driving without run-flat correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
tires have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving Possible driving distance with complete loss of
may result in serious accidents. tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec
and the driving style and conditions.
essary.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
Actions in the event of a flat tire possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/
80 km.
Normal tires When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
1. Identify the damaged tire. its handling characteristics change, e.g., re
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
braking distance, and altered self-steering
four tires.
properties. Adjust your driving style accord
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
Because the possible driving distance depends
the system.
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
If an identification is not possible, please actual distance may be smaller or greater de
contact the service center. pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
2. Rectify the flat tire. external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, Continued driving with a flat tire
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
this case, have the electronics checked at
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
the next opportunity and have them re
placed if necessary. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re
Run-flat tires duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop
Maximum speed erties.

You can continue driving with a damaged tire at Final tire failure
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
Continued driving with a flat tire
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: come loose and cause an accident. Do not con
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu tinue driving, and contact your service center.
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

Message when the system was not flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
reset telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
A Check Control message is displayed. your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
The system detected a wheel change but was
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
not reset.
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
pressure are not reliable. may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub
system. stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
Malfunction pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
The yellow warning lamp flashes and the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
then lights up continuously. A Check tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
Control message is displayed. No flat equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
tire can be detected. indicate when the system is not operating prop
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com
Display in the following situations: bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
have the service center check it if necessary. flash for approximately one minute and then re
Malfunction: have the system checked by main continuously illuminated. This sequence
your service center. will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal
TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
tem again.
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
Disturbance by systems or devices with the as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
same radio frequency: after leaving the area a variety of reasons, including the installation of
of the disturbance, the system automatically replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
becomes active again. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
Declaration according to NHTSA/ telltale after replacing one or more tires or
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re
System placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) the TPMS to continue to function properly.
should be checked monthly when cold and in
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard FTM Flat Tire Monitor
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on The concept
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la
The system does not measure the actual infla
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla
tion pressure in the tires.
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one while moving.
or more of your tires is significantly under-in

100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con
therefore the rotational speed of the corre firming the inflation pressures.
sponding wheel change. This is detected and Do not initialize the system when driving with
reported as a flat tire. snow chains.

Functional requirements 1. "Vehicle Info"


The system must have been initialized when the 2. "Vehicle status"
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, 3. "Reset"
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or 5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
wheel change. 6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
System limits which can be interrupted at any time.
Sudden tire damage The initialization automatically continues when
Sudden serious tire damage caused by driving resumes.
external influences cannot be indicated in ad
vance. Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can
Check Control message is displayed.
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla
tion pressure regularly. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations: 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
When the system has not been initialized. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu
vers.
When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration. Run-flat tires, refer to page 280, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
When driving with snow chains.
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Status display Do not continue driving without run-flat


The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can tires
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
whether or not the FTM is active. equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed. Actions in the event of a flat tire

Initialization Normal tires


The initialization process adopts the set inflation 1. Identify the damaged tire.
tire pressures as reference values for the detec

101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

Do this by checking the air pressure in all Because the possible driving distance depends
four tires. on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is actual distance may be smaller or greater de
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
been initialized. In this case, initialize the external temperature, cargo load, etc.
system. Continued driving with a flat tire
If an identification is not possible, please Drive moderately and do not exceed a
contact the service center. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
2. Rectify the flat tire. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re
Run-flat tires duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop
Maximum speed erties.
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
Continued driving with a flat tire indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu tinue driving, and contact your service center.
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the Lane departure warning
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is The concept
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have This system issues a warning at speeds above
been initialized. In this case, initialize the approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about
system. to leave the lane on roads with lane markings.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. The
tire inflation pressure: time of the warning may vary depending on the
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire current driving situation.
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load The system does not provide a warning if the
and the driving style and conditions. turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ Switching on/off
80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

Press the button. System limits


Personal responsibility
On: the LED lights up.
The system cannot serve as a substitute
Off: the LED goes out. for the driver's personal judgment of the course
The system can issue warnings at speeds above of the road and the traffic situation.
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
The state is stored for the remote control cur wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.
rently in use.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Display
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as
in construction areas.
When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
When the lane markings are covered by ob
jects.
Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. When driving very close to the vehicle in
Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking front of you.
was detected and warnings can be issued. When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield in front of the interior
Issued warning rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ered with stickers, etc.
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi
brating. Malfunctions
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued. Steering wheel vibration
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra
End of warning tion causes the system to overheat.
The warning ends: This causes the lane departure warning to be
come deactivated.
Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
When returning to your own lane.
the button.
When braking hard.
When using the turn signal.

103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

Camera Switching on/off

The camera is located near the base of the mir


Press the button.
ror.
Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in
On: the LED lights up.
front of the interior rear view mirror.
Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The state is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.
The concept
Display

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon


itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
Information stage
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly. Warning
Before you change lanes after setting the turn If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
tions described above. and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror brightly.
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit
ical zone.

104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Safety Controls

System limits A Check Control message is displayed when the


system is not fully functional.
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic For US owners only
situation. The transmitter and receiver units comply with
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi Commission regulations. Operation is governed
cle. by the following:
FCC ID:
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations: NBG009014A.

When a vehicle is approaching at a speed Compliance statement:


much faster than your own. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
This device may not cause harmful interfer
Malfunctions ence, and
this device must accept any interference re
Steering wheel vibration ceived, including interference that may
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra cause undesired operation.
tion causes the system to overheat. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be these devices could void the user's authority to
come deactivated. operate this equipment.

Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing


the button.
Brake force display
Radar sensors
The concept

The radar sensors are located under the rear


bumper. During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations: During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Dirty or icy bumper.
Stickers on the bumper.

105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Safety

Active Protection
The concept
With Active Protection, critical driving situations
that might lead to an accident can be detected.
In in these situations, preventative protection
measures are automatically undertaken to min
imize the risk in the event of an accident as much
as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
Full application of the brakes.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
With Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func
tion, impending collisions with vehicles driving
ahead or stopped in front of you can also be de
tected.
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation. Adapt speed to traffic situation and
drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may re
sult.

Function
After the safety belt is buckled and the door is
closed, the front belts are automatically tight
ened once after the vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi
vidual functions become active:
The front belts are automatically tightened.
Automatic closing of the windows.
Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
Automatic Positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other
systems can be restored to the desired setting.

106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving stability control systems Controls

Driving stability control systems


Vehicle equipment Drive-off assistant
All standard, country-specific and optional This system supports driving away on gradients.
equipment that is offered in the model series is The parking brake is not required.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip 2. Release the foot brake and drive away with
ment or country variant. This also applies for out delay.
safety-related functions and systems. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
Antilock Brake System ABS is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak Driving off without delay
ing.
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
The vehicle remains steerable even during full without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
brake applications, thus increasing active not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap
safety. prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
ABS is operational every time you start the en back.
gine.

DSC Dynamic Stability


Brake assistant Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking The concept
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
possible braking distance during full braking. when driving away and accelerating.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi
by ABS. tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
for the duration of the full braking. on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
Adaptive brake assistant
An appropriate driving style is always the
In combination with the Active Cruise Control, responsibility of the driver.
this system ensures that the brakes respond
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa
with DSC.
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 120. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.

107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving stability control systems

Indicator/warning lamps DTC Dynamic Traction


The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con Control
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has The concept
failed. The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF The system ensures maximum forward momen
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri
ate caution.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un
axle steering. der the following special circumstances:
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again When driving in slush or on uncleared,
as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.
When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
Deactivating DSC deep snow or on loose surfaces.
Press and hold the button, but not lon When driving with snow chains.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. Traction Control
The DSC system is switched off. Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
Activating DSC and when driving in bends.
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp Activating DTC
go out. Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru
Indicator/warning lamps ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis lights up.
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de Deactivating DTC
activated.
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.

Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.

108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving stability control systems Controls

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy


namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis Press up the rocker switch to the point of
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear resistance: the speed increases gradually.
axles as demanded by the driving situation and Press up the rocker switch past the point of
road surface. resistance: the speed increases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
Press down the rocker switch to the point of
HDC Hill Descent Control resistance: the speed decreases gradually.

The concept Press down the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: when driving forward, the
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto
speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h;
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down
when reversing, the speed decreases to ap
hill gradients. Without the brakes being applied,
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
the vehicle moves at slightly more than twice
walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds Activating HDC
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to ap
prox. twice walking speed and then keeps its
speed constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system is
on standby. The system does not brake the ve
hicle during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position
D or R only.
Press the button; the LED above the but
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed ton lights up.
Specify desired speed in the range from approx.
4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using Deactivating HDC
the rocker switch of the cruise control on the
steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed Press the button again and the LED goes
by lightly accelerating. out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving stability control systems

Display in the instrument cluster SPORT


The selected speed is displayed Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
in the speedometer.
Green: the system is actively
COMFORT
braking the vehicle. Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Orange: the system is on
standby.
Dynamic Damping Control
Malfunction The concept
A message is displayed in the instrument clus This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav
brake temperatures. eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
Adaptive Drive driving style.

The concept Programs


Adaptive Drive includes the following systems: The system offers three different programs.
Dynamic Drive, refer to page 110 The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamic Damping Control, refer to Experience Switch, refer to page 111.
page 110
The system increases driving stability and driv SPORT
ing comfort. Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb
ers for greater driving agility.

Dynamic Drive COMFORT


Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
The concept SPORT programs.
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in COMFORT+
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
Driving stability and driving comfort are in for optimal traveling comfort.
creased under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa Integral Active Steering
tions.
The concept
Programs Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac
The system offers two different programs. tive Steering and rear axle steering.
The programs can be selected via the Driving Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
Experience Switch, refer to page 111. wheels in relation to the steering wheel move
ment as a function of the speed.

110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving stability control systems Controls

At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., COMFORT


in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
steering becomes more direct. for optimal traveling comfort.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a Malfunction
direction opposite to the front wheels. In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas must be turned further, while the vehicle re
ingly reduced. sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as movements in the higher speed range.
the front wheels. The stability-enhancing intervention may be de
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can activated.
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, Have the system checked.
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Driving Experience Switch
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi The concept
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The Driving Experience Switch can be used to
The warning lamp lights up. A Check adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For
Control message is displayed. this purpose various programs are available for
selection that are activated via the two buttons
1. With the engine running, turn the steering of the Driving Experience Switch and the DSC
wheel all the way to the left and right several OFF-button.
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears. Operating the programs
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer Press the button Program
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle. DSC OFF
TRACTION
Using snow chains
SPORT+
Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
SPORT
when using snow chains, refer to page 280.
COMFORT
Programs COMFORT+
The system offers two different programs. ECO PRO
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 111. For Dynamic Damper Control, the lower button
is labeled with COMFORT.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.

111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving stability control systems

Automatic program change The program can be configured to individual


The system automatically switches to COM specifications.
FORT in the following situations: The configuration is stored for the remote con
Failure of Integral Active Steering. trol currently in use.

Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.


Activating SPORT
The vehicle has a flat tire.
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 108, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration Configuring SPORT
and when driving in bends. If the display on the Control Display, refer to
page 113,is activated, the sport program can be
TRACTION set to individual specifications.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has max After the sport program is activated, select
imum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dy "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed
namic Traction Control, refer to page 108, is ac panel and configure the program.
tivated. Driving stability is limited during Optionally, the sport program can be configured
acceleration and when driving in bends. before it is activated:

SPORT+ 1. "Settings"
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus 2. "SPORT mode"
pension with limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.

Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in
strument cluster. 3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when the sport
program is activated.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. COMFORT
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta
namic Traction Control is activated. bilization.

Activating COMFORT
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for Press the button repeatedly until the
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta program display in the tachometer
bilization. goes out.

112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving stability control systems Controls

In certain situations, the system automatically 3. "Configure ECO PRO"


changes to the NORMAL program, automatic Make the desired settings.
program change, refer to page 112.
Displays in the instrument cluster
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers Selected program
for optimal traveling comfort with maximum
The selected program is dis
driving stabilization.
played in the tachometer.

Activating COMFORT+
Press the button repeatedly until COM
FORT+ appears in the tachometer.
Program selection
ECO PRO Pressing the button displays a list
Consistent tuning to minimize fuel consumption of the selectable programs.
for maximum range with maximum driving sta
bilization.
Comfort functions and the engine controller are
adjusted.
Display on the Control Display
The program can be configured to individual Program changes can be displayed briefly on
specifications. the Control Display.

Activating ECO PRO To do so, make the following settings:

Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO 1. "Settings"


is displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"

or

1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"

113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment Buttons at a glance

All standard, country-specific and optional


equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Active Cruise Control with 1 System on/off, interrupt


Stop & Go function, ACC 2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
The concept
4 Reduce distance
This system can be used to select a desired
5 Store, maintain/change speed
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati
cally on clear roads. 6 Increase distance
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of Switching on/off and interrupting
you. cruise control
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. Switching on
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
begins moving faster. to the current speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the Cruise control can be used.
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives Switching off
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to Deactivated or interrupted system
accelerate if operated accordingly.
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
Even if some time passes before the vehicle actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
erated automatically and simply. danger of an accident occurring.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
If switching off the system while stationary,
desired speed.
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill Press the button.
slopes if engine power is insufficient.

114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

If active: press twice. Adapting the desired speed


If interrupted: press once. Adapt the desired speed to the road con
The displays go out. The stored desired speed ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other
and distance are deleted. wise, there is the danger of an accident occur
ring.
Interrupting Speed differences
When active, press the button. Great speed differences with vehicles
driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap
If interrupting the system while stationary, press proaching a truck or when another vehicle
on the brake pedal at the same time. swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen
The system is automatically interrupted if: sated for by the system.
The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed.
Transmission position D is disengaged.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
DSC is actively controlling stability.
The safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing.
The system has not detected objects for an Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit until the desired speed is set.
tle traffic without road edge line markings. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
Radar sensor is soiled. vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
Maintaining/storing the speed Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
Press the button. point of resistance, the desired speed in
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
When the system is switched on, the
1 km/h.
current speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed. Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
increases or decreases by a maximum of
displayed in the instrument cluster.
5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:
When cruise control is maintained or stored, 110 mph/180 km/h.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
necessary.
action.

Changing, maintaining, and storing the


speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur
rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.

115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Distance Green mark in the speedometer during a


brief idle phase:
Selecting a distance
The vehicle ahead of you drives away while
Adjust the distance according to the traffic
the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
without anything having to be done.
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance. Switch to orange of the mark in the speed
ometer after approx. 2 sec.:
Reduce distance The vehicle ahead of you drives away, while
the mark is orange: in order to accelerate,
Press the button repeatedly until the briefly press the gas pedal or press the RES
desired distance is set. button or SET button.
The selected distance, refer to page 117, is dis Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
played in the instrument cluster. the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by
Increase distance pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing
Press the button repeatedly until the behind another vehicle:
desired distance is set.
1. Press the button to call up a stored
The selected distance, refer to page 117, is dis desired speed.
played in the instrument cluster.
2. Release the brake pedal.
Calling up the desired speed and 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
distance RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
While driving
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the button with the system
switched on.
Desired speed
In the following cases, the stored speed value is The marking lights up in
deleted and cannot be called up again: green: the system is active.
When the system is switched off. The marking lights up in or
When the ignition is switched off. ange: the system has been
interrupted.
While standing The marking does not light up: the system is
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it switched off.
against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run Brief status display
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans Selected desired speed.
mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.

The system brought the vehicle to a complete If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
standstill. Control messages, it is possible that the system

116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

requirements for operation are currently not The vehicle symbol lights up in orange:
met. A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
ahead of you is shown. The conditions are not adequate for op
Distance display erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
Distance 1 brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.

Distance 2 The vehicle symbol flashes red and an


acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak
Distance 3
ing or making an evasive maneuver.

Distance 4 System limits


This value is set after the system is
switched on. Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys
The system has been interrupted or tem on well-developed roads and highways.
distance control is deactivated be The desired speed can be selected between
cause the accelerator is being 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
The system can also be activated when station
Distance control is deactivated be ary.
cause the accelerator is being Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa
pressed; a vehicle was detected. tion when using the system.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away. Detection range

Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.

Depending on how the vehicle is equip


The detection capacity of the system and the
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument
automatic braking capacity are limited.
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.

117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Limited detection capacity ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,


Because of the limits to the detection ca when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, system requests that the driver intervene by
there is the danger of an accident occurring. braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta
Unexpected lane change
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
Red traffic lights.
Stationary objects.
Cross traffic.
Approaching traffic. If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
No warnings into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
A warning may not be issued when ap you yourself must react, as the system does not
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob react to stopped vehicles.
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring. Cornering

Swerving vehicles

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the


speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There
until it is completely within the same lane as your fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
vehicle. In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
Swerving vehicles which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly detected at all, or not until after a considerable
swerves into your lane, the system may not be delay.
able to automatically restore the selected dis
tance. This also applies to major speed differ

118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
not aligned correctly. This may be caused by
damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.

For US owners only


When approaching a curve, the system may re The transmitter and receiver units comply with
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the Commission regulations. Operation is governed
vehicle by the system can be compensated for by the following:
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator FCC ID:
pedal is released, the system becomes active OAYARS3-A
again and independently controls the speed.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Driving away Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive conditions:
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be
This device may not cause harmful interfer
hind bumps in the road.
ence, and

Radar sensor this device must accept any interference re


ceived, including interference that may
Position cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Note
To reduce electromagnetic effects, please use
properly.
The standard SAR value is 2.0 W/kg; the tested
value of this product is 0.751 W/kg.
Radar sensor NCC declaration:

1. Companies or persons without authoriza


Dirty or covered sensor tion should not change the frequency, in
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec crease the power, or change the character
tion of vehicles. istics or functions of the original design of
If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re low-power radio frequency devices with
move layers of snow and ice carefully. type approval.
Do not cover the view field of the radar sen 2. Low-power radio frequency devices should
sor. not impair legal communication or flight
safety. If this type of impairment is detected,

119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

the device should be switched off immedi Acute warning with braking function
ately. In this case, please contact the man Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
ufacturer and only use the product after the when the vehicle approaches another object at
problem has been corrected. a relatively high differential speed.
3. The "legal communication" specified above The acute warning prompts the driver to inter
refers to communication in accordance with vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
telecommunication regulations. Low-power accompanied by a braking intervention.
devices should withstand interference from
The braking intervention is executed with lim
legal communication and ISM devices.
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The
intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com
plete standstill.
Collision warning with
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
braking function Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 107, is
switched on.
The concept
The system issues a two-phase warning of a Adapting your speed and driving style
danger of collision at speeds above approx. The acute warning does not relieve the
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
may vary depending on the current driving sit driving speed and style to the traffic condi
uation. tions.
The collision warning is available even if cruise The braking intervention can be interrupted by
control has been deactivated. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch
off the collision warning with braking function to
prevent undesired interventions.
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is deactivated.

Switching the warning function on/off


It responds to stationary or moving objects that
are within the detection range of the radar sys
tem.

When the vehicle is intentionally brought into


contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.

Warning stages

Prewarning Press the button


This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis
On: the LED lights up.
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Off: the LED goes out. to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
The state is stored for the remote control cur accident occurring.
rently in use.
Detection range
Configuring the prewarning This may result in the warning not being issued
After the warning function is switched on, the or being issued late.
following can be set via the iDrive: For example, the following situations may not be
The prewarning can be switched on/off. detected:
The time of the prewarning can be set. Slow moving vehicles when you approach
These settings have no effect on the time of the them at high speed.
warning from the Active Cruise Control that Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
prompts the driver to intervene or brake. or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Display in the instrument cluster
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The collision warning can be issued in the in
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and Functional limitations
acoustically.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Warning stages
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
Symbol Measure In tight curves.
The vehicle lights up in red: prewarn
Prewarning sensitivity
ing.
Each time after the prewarning time is set, this
Increase distance.
may result in increased false warnings.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn
ing. Cruise control
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu The concept
ver. The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Adapting your speed and driving style It maintains the speed that was set using the
The display does not relieve the driver of control elements on the steering wheel.
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving The system brakes on downhill gradients if en
speed and style to the traffic conditions. gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
System limits Do not use the system if unfavorable con
Be alert ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
Due to system limitations, warnings may speed, for instance:
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or On curvy roads.
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready In heavy traffic.

121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on Maintaining/storing the current speed


a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.

Controls

At a glance

Switching on
Press the rocker switch while the system is in
Press the button on the steering wheel.
terrupted.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the When the system is switched on, the current
current speed. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
Cruise control can be used. speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
Switching off displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
Deactivated or interrupted system the speedometer, refer to page 123.

If the system is deactivated or interrupted, When cruise control is maintained or stored,


actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the necessary.
danger of an accident occurring.
Change, maintain speed
Press the button. The rocker switch can be pressed while inter
rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
If active: press twice.
Adapting the desired speed
If interrupted: press once.
Adapt the desired speed to the road con
The displays go out. The stored desired speed ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other
is deleted. wise, there is the danger of an accident occur
ring.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:


The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed.
Transmission position D is disengaged.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
DSC is actively controlling stability. until the desired speed is set.
HDC is activated.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the Brief status display
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
Selected desired speed.
clear.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ Control messages, it is possible that the system
1 km/h. requirements for operation are currently not
Each time the rocker switch is pressed past met.
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. PDC Park Distance Control
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler The concept
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is backup camera, refer to page 126, can be
released, the vehicle maintains its final switched on.
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
sistance point causes the vehicle to accel you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
erate more rapidly. your vehicle are indicated with:
Signal tones.
Resuming the desired speed
Visual display.
Press the button.
Measurement
The stored speed is reached and maintained. Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
Indicator lamp An acoustic warning is first given:

Depending on how the vehicle is equip By the front sensors and the two rear corner
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
cluster indicates whether the system is By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
switched on. 1.50 m.

System limits
Desired speed
Check the traffic situation as well
The marking lights up in
green: the system is active. PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa
The marking lights up in or
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi
ange: the system has been
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
interrupted.
could result from road users or objects located
The marking does not light up: the system is outside of the PDC detection range.
switched off.

123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle Switching on automatically
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal Select transmission position R with the engine
tone. running.
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Switching off automatically
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for
active.
ward.
For technical reasons, the system may other
Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv
wise be too late in issuing a warning.
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical Switching on/off manually
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
With tow bars and trailer hitches.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With low objects.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected. Press the button.

False warnings On: the LED lights up.


PDC may issue a warning under the following Off: the LED goes out.
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range: Signal tones
In heavy rain. When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
When sensors are very dirty or covered in
object. For example, if an object is detected to
ice.
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
When sensors are covered in snow. from the left rear speaker.
On rough road surfaces. The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
In large buildings with right angles and the shorter the intervals.
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages. If the distance to a detected object is less than
In heavy exhaust. approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sounded.
sweeping machines, high pressure steam If objects are located both in front of and behind
cleaners or neon lights. the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.

124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.


3 seconds:
If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen
sors.
If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
When the vehicle moves away from an ob
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. Forward gear or transmission position D en
When transmission position P is engaged. gaged: front area of the vehicle.
Reverse gear or transmission position R en
Volume gaged: rear area of the vehicle.
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 191.
Display on the Control Display
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use. Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
Visual warning With PDC activated:
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be "Rear view camera"
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis The backup camera image is displayed. The set
play before a signal tone sounds. ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
Malfunction
If the backup camera image was selected last, it A Check Control message is displayed.
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.

Zoom view
On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and
is shown enlarged.
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.

To ensure full operability:


Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

When using a pressure washer, keep the Automatic deactivation during forward
sprayer moving and maintain a distance of travel
at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors. The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Surround View
Switching on/off manually
The concept
Surround View includes the following systems:
Backup camera, refer to page 126.
Side View, refer to page 130.
Top View, refer to page 128.
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
and on blind driveways and intersections.

Backup camera Press the button.

The concept On: the LED lights up.


The backup camera provides assistance in park Off: the LED goes out.
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
System limits to page 128.

Check the traffic situation as well Assistance functions


Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident Functional requirement
could result from road users or objects located The backup camera is switched on.
outside the picture area of the backup camera.
The trunk lid is fully closed.
Detection of objects
Pathway lines
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.

Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.

Can be shown in the backup camera image


when in transmission position R.

126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Help you to estimate the space required 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
when parking and maneuvering on level the pathway line covers the corresponding
roads. turning circle line.
Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer
ing wheel movements.

Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 127.

Turning circle lines

Obstacle marking

Can be shown in the backup camera image.


Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned. Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 127.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
Parking using pathway and turning
to the object shown.
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking Activating the assistance functions
space. More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines


"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking


"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Display on the Control Display Top View


Switching on the backup camera via The concept
iDrive
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver
With PDC activated: ing. The area around the doors and the road area
"Rear view camera" around the vehicle are shown on the Control
The backup camera image is displayed. The set Display for this purpose.
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use. Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras
Brightness integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
With the backup camera switched on: backup camera.
The range equals:
1. Select the symbol.
Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller. approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex
Contrast terior mirrors are detected early.
With the backup camera switched on:
System limits
1. Select the symbol.
Top View cannot be used in the following situa
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting tions:
is reached and press the controller.
With a door open.

Camera With the trunk lid open.


With an exterior mirror folded in.
In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
The camera lens is located in the handle of the outside the picture area of the cameras.
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt. Switching on automatically
Clean the lens, refer to page 307. Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.

128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Automatic deactivation during forward If the backup camera image was selected last, it
travel again appears on the display. To switch to Top
The system switches off when a certain driving View:
distance or speed is exceeded. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
Switch the system back on if necessary. the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
Switching on/off manually rently in use.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via


iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
Press the button. use.

On: the LED lights up. Brightness


With Top View switched on:
Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup 1. "Brightness"
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 129. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be Contrast
shown on the Control Display. With Top View switched on:
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
1. "Contrast"
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.

Displaying the turning circle and


pathway lines
The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
The variable, green pathway line assists you
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac in assessing the amount of space actually
tivated. needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur
rent steering angle and is continuously ad
justed with the steering wheel movement.

129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

"Parking aid lines" Switching on/off


Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

Cameras

Press the button.

The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo Automatic deactivation during forward
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous travel
ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
The system switches off when a certain driving
Clean the lens, refer to page 307. distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.

Side View Display on the Control Display


The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
The concept on the Control Display.
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.

System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
330 ft/100 m. position of the front of the vehicle.

Display
Brightness
The images from both cameras are shown si
With the Side View switched on:
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well 1. "Brightness"

Check the traffic situation around the ve 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with is reached and press the controller.
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.

130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Contrast When parking, also take note of the visual and


With the Side View switched on: acoustic information issued by the PDC and the
parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac
1. "Contrast" cordingly.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting A component of the parking assistant is the PDC
is reached and press the controller. Park Distance Control, refer to page 123.
Personal responsibility
Cameras
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.

Requirements

The two camera lenses are located on the sides For measuring parking spaces
of the bumper. Maximum speed while driving forward ap
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Clean the lens, refer to page 307. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space


Parking assistant Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The concept
Minimum length: own vehicle length plus
approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure


Closed doors.

This system assists the driver in parking parallel


to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Switching on

Using the button

Gray: the system is not activated.


Parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
Press the button. found.
The LED lights up.
The parking procedure is active.
The current status of the parking space search
Steering control has been seized.
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.

By engaging reverse
Engage reverse gear or transmission position Status of the parking space search
R.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.

Display on the Control Display

System status
Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
Symbol Meaning Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
Gray: the system is not available. The vehicle is parked in the parking space if
the parking procedure is active.
White: the system is available but not
activated. No display: no parking space search.

The system is activated. Parking using the parking assistant


Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.

132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Watch the parking space and parking procedure "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, the Control Display.
there is the danger of an accident.
Interrupting automatically
Check the traffic situation as well
The procedure is interrupted automatically:
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/
cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking
10 km/h.
assistant and PDC.
On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
if necessary.
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan
ger of an accident. If doors are open.
A Check Control message is displayed.
1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate
it if necessary.
Continuing
The status of the parking space search is in
An interrupted parking procedure can be con
dicated on the Control Display.
tinued if necessary.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to
play.
do this.
The end of the parking procedure is indi
cated on the Control Display. Switching off
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec The system can be deactivated as follows:
essary.
Press the button.
Notes
Switch off the ignition.
The parking assistant takes control of steer
ing for as long as the symbol for active park
Malfunction
ing appears on the display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system maneuvers the vehicle to posi
tion it properly in smaller parking spaces, for The parking assistant failed. Have the system
example. checked.
To achieve the best possible parking posi
System limits
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the Changes to the parking space
vehicle is stationary. Changes to the parking space after it was
When parking in parking spaces on the driv measured are not taken into account by the sys
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must tem.
be set. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci
Interrupting manually dent occurring.
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time by: Transporting loads

Grasping the steering wheel and steering Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
yourself. of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.

133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter Ultrasound sensors


vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci
dent occurring.

Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle
may become damaged.
The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park
No parking assistance ing spaces are located in the side turn signals.
The parking assistant does not provide assis To ensure full operability:
tance in parking. Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
In tight curves. When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main
Functional limitations tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
When sensors are dirty or iced over. Night Vision with pedestrian
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. detection
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. The concept
When leaves or snow has collected in the Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
parking space. vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
Limits of ultrasonic measurement the vehicle and displays the image on the Con
The detection of objects can reach the physical trol Display.
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: The picture is a heat image. The system has an
With tow bars and trailer hitches. integrated pedestrian detection function that
With thin or wedge-shaped objects. detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
With elevated, protruding objects such as
detected by the system.
ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges. Personal responsibility

With objects with a fine surface structure, Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
such as fences. personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
The parking assistant may identify parking actual visibility conditions must always be the
spaces that are not suitable for parking. basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.

134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Heat image People detected by the system are displayed


with a slight yellow hue.

Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian


detection system operates within a range of ap
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.

The image shows the heat radiated by objects


in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the Environmental influences can limit the availabil
temperature difference between the object and ity of pedestrian detection.
the background and on the level of heat radiation
If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
is displayed in the heat image.
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect. This symbol disappears when the function be
comes available again.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
Warning of people in danger
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.

Pedestrian detection

If the system detects a person in the defined


area in front of the vehicle and if there is the dan
ger of a collision with this person, a warning
symbol appears in the Control Display and
Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
The pedestrian detection and warning system
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.

135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Warning area in front of the vehicle located in the central area, the distance to the
person is indicated by the size of the symbol.

System limits

Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided When the camera is dirty or the protective
into two areas. glass is damaged.
Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Expanded area 2 to the right and left. At very high external temperatures.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes Limits of pedestrian detection
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
example. the image.
Limited pedestrian detection:
Prewarning When people are fully or partially covered,
The yellow symbol is displayed when a especially when their heads are covered.
person is detected in the central area, When people are not in an upright position,
arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve e.g., when lying down.
hicle.
Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person detected in the extended area, After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
arrow 2, is moving from the right or left after an accident.
to the central area.
Activation/deactivation
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds. You are requested to intervene
immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.

Display in the Head-up Display


The warning is simultaneously dis
played in the Head-up Display and in the
Control Display. The displayed symbol Press the button.
can vary with the people detected. For people

136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving comfort Controls

Display Head-up Display


Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not
available on the rear screen. The concept

Adjustments via the iDrive


With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
"Brightness"
This system projects important information into
"Contrast"
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
"Pedestrian detection"
In this way, the driver can get information with
The settings are stored for the remote control out averting his or her eyes from the road.
currently in use.

Camera Display visibility


The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis
play is influenced by:
Certain sitting positions.
Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis
play.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet roads.
Unfavorable light conditions.
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper If the image is distorted, check the basic set
ation. tings.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low. Switching on/off
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 307.

Press the button.

137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Driving comfort

Display tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,


refer to page 93.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.

Adjusting the height


1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
1 Lane departure warning
The height is adjusted.
2 Active Cruise Control
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
3 Desired speed
rently in use.
4 Navigation system
5 Speed Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The collision warning, Night Vision pedestrian
warning, or Check Control messages are dis The shape of the windshield makes it possible
played briefly if needed. to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
Selecting displays in the Head-up from being displayed.
Display Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
1. "Settings" by a service center only.
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Setting the brightness


The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi

138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Climate control Controls

Climate control
Vehicle equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
All standard, country-specific and optional ment or country variant. This also applies for
equipment that is offered in the model series is safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left 11 Air distribution, right


2 Temperature, left 12 Seat heating, right50
3 AUTO program, left 13 Active seat ventilation, right50
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat, 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu
left lated-air mode
5 Remove ice and condensation 15 Cooling function
6 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster
7 Display 17 ALL program
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 18 Active seat ventilation, left50
9 AUTO program, right 19 Seat heating, left50
10 Temperature, right

139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Climate control

Climate control functions in detail rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
Note The cooling function, refer to page 141, is
is continuously shown on the display of the switched on automatically with the AUTO pro
automatic climate control. gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con
Manual air distribution trols the program so as to prevent window con
Press the button repeatedly to select a densation as much as possible.
program:
Intensity of the AUTO program
Upper body region. With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
Upper body region and footwell. control of the air volume and air distribution can
Footwell. be adjusted.
Windows and footwell: driver's side only. Press the left or right side of the button:
Windows, upper body region and footwell: decrease or increase the intensity.
driver's side only.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO of the automatic climate control.
button on the driver's side to utilize the conden
sation sensor. Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
Temperature switch off the AUTO program first.
Turn the wheel to set the desired
Press the left or right side of the button:
temperature.
decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the display


of the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control achieves this The air volume of the automatic climate control
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary may be reduced automatically to save battery
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, power.
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem Defrosting windows and removing
perature settings. The automatic climate control condensation
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
Press the button.
temperature.
Ice and condensation are quickly re
AUTO program moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem The air volume can be adjusted when the pro
perature are controlled automatically. gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, additionally
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO switch on the cooling function or press the
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.

140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Climate control Controls

Maximum cooling Cooling function


Press the button. The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
The system is set to the lowest tem
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- Press the button.
air mode. The air is cooled and dehumidified and
depending on the temperature setting
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re
warmed again.
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible: Depending on the weather, the windshield may
At an external temperature of approx. 32 / fog up briefly when the engine is started.
0 . The cooling function is switched on automati
When the engine is running. cally with the AUTO program.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro When using the automatic climate control, con
gram is active. densation water, refer to page 162, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode Rear window defroster
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu Press the button.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo The rear window defroster switches off
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The automatically after a certain period of time.
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
ALL program
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode: Press the button.
The current settings on the driver's side
LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. for temperature, air volume, air distribution, and
Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con AUTO program are transferred to the front pas
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out senger side and to the left and right rear.
side air and controls the shut-off automati The program is switched off if the settings on
cally. the front passenger side or in the rear are
Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the changed.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per
manently blocked.
Residual heat
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but interior.
ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa
tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the Functional requirement
windshield.
Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
Continuous recirculated-air mode switched off.
The recirculated-air mode should not be Warm engine.
used for an extended period of time, as the air
The battery is sufficiently charged.
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.
External temperature below 77 /25 .

141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Climate control

Switching on Ventilation
1. Switch off the ignition.
Front ventilation
2. Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli
mate control.
The interior temperature, air volume and air dis
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.

Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the Thumbwheels for adjusting the tempera
button on the driver's side. ture, arrows 1.
on the display of the automatic climate control Toward blue: colder.
goes out. Toward red: warmer.
Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar
Switching the system on/off
row 2.
Switching off Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Complete system:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the driver's Ventilation levels
side. Draft-free ventilation:
On the front passenger side: Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
At the lowest fan speed, press the current is fanned out.
left side of the button on the front Maximum air volume:
passenger side. Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is
partially fanned out and partially bundled.
Switching on This maximizes the air supply.
Press any button. Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
bundled and can be directed to a specific
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from point.
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous Adjusting the ventilation
pollutants from the outside air that enters the Ventilation for cooling:
vehicle.
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di
This combined filter should be replaced during rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 288, of the sun.
your vehicle.
Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Climate control Controls

Ventilation in rear, center Rear automatic climate


control
At a glance

Thumbwheels for adjusting the tempera


ture, arrows 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer. 1 Temperature
Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar 2 AUTO program
row 2. 3 Vent settings
Thumbwheels for opening and closing the 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity
vents continuously, arrow 3.
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
Lateral ventilation
7 Seat heating50

Switching the rear automatic climate


control on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
The rear automatic climate control is not opera
tional if the automatic climate control is
Thumbwheel for opening and closing the switched off or if the function for defrosting or
vents continuously, arrow 1. defogging the windows is active.
Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar
row 2. AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem
perature are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO


intensity, and outside influences, the air is di
rected to the upper body and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati
cally with the AUTO program.

143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Climate control

Intensity of the AUTO program Switching the system on/off


With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can Switching off
be adjusted. At the lowest fan speed, press the left
Press the left or right side of the button: side of the button on the driver's side.
decrease or increase the intensity.
Switching on
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control. Press any button.

Temperature Maximum cooling


Turn the wheel to set the desired Press the button.
temperature. The system is set to the lowest tem
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re


The automatic climate control achieves this
gion. Open them for this purpose.
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
and then keeps it constant. At an external temperature of approx. 32 /
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem 0 .
perature settings. The automatic climate control When the engine is running.
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Parked-car ventilation
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individual The concept
needs. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
Press the button repeatedly to select a interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
program: The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re
Upper body region. mains switched on for 30 minutes.
Upper body region and footwell. They can be operated via iDrive.
Footwell.
Parked-car ventilation
Air volume, manual Using the preset switch-on time or when oper
To be able to manually adjust the air volume, ated directly: any external temperature.
switch off the AUTO program first. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume. Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control. 2. "Climate"

144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Climate control Controls

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate control


flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.

Preselecting the switch-on time


1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time


1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.

145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Interior equipment

Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment transmitter, the remote-controlled device is
generally compatible with the integrated univer
All standard, country-specific and optional sal remote control.
equipment that is offered in the model series is
If you have any questions, please contact:
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, Your service center.
e. g., because of the selected optional equip www.homelink.com on the Internet.
ment or country variant. This also applies for HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
safety-related functions and systems. Controls, Inc.

Programming
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
hand-held transmitters for various types of re
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro
grammed on one of the three memory buttons. LED, arrow 1.
The corresponding device can then be operated Memory buttons, arrow 2.
using the programmed memory button.
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
mitted.
1. Switch on the ignition.
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro
grams for security reasons. 2. Initial setup:
Press the two outer memory buttons 1 and
During programming
3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED, ar
During programming and before activat row 1 flashes.
ing a device using the integrated universal re
All programs of the three memory buttons,
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
arrow 2, are cleared.
animals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
is a risk of injury or damage. approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the mem
ory buttons.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter. The required distance depends on the
manual transmitter.
Compatibility 4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
the hand-held transmitter and the memory
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
button of the integrated universal remote
or in the instructions of the hand-held
control.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Interior equipment Controls

The LED flashes slowly. Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes ond person.
rapidly. 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. controlled device.
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat 2. Program the integrated universal remote
the step. control as described above under Fixed-
Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly af code hand-held transmitters.
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance 3. Locate the button on the receiver of the de
and repeat the step, or, if the programming vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
was interrupted by the hand-held transmit
4. Press the button on the receiver of the de
ter, hold down the memory button and press
vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
and release the button on the hand-held
for the next step.
transmitter again for 2 seconds.
5. Hold down the programmed memory button
6. To program other hand-held transmitters,
of the integrated universal remote for ap
repeat steps 3 to 5.
prox. 3 seconds. Repeat this work step, if
The device can be operated using the memory necessary, up to three times.
button with the engine running or the ignition
The device can be operated using the memory
switched on.
button with the engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Malfunction
If the device cannot be used after repeated at Reassigning individual programs
tempts at programming, please check whether
1. Switch on the ignition.
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an
alternating code system. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the mem
To do so:
ory buttons.
Read the instructions of the hand-held
The required distance depends on the
transmitter.
manual transmitter.
Hold down the memory button of the
3. Hold down the memory button of the
integrated universal remote control longer.
integrated universal remote control.
If the LED of the integrated universal remote
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
control flashes rapidly for a brief period and then
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
lights up continuously, the hand-held transmit
the hand-held transmitter.
ter is equipped with an alternating code system.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
In this case, program the memory buttons as
rapidly.
described under Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
Alternating-code hand-held the step.
transmitters Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly after
Please obtain information on synchronizing the approx. 60 seconds, change the distance and
device in the operating manual of the device be repeat the step, or, if the programming was in
ing set up. terrupted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
down the memory button and press and release

147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Interior equipment

the button on the hand-held transmitter again Front: automatic transmission


for 2 seconds.
Opening
Deleting all stored programs
Press the two outer memory buttons for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
All stored programs are deleted.
The programs cannot be deleted individually.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Press on the cover.
Front: manual transmission

Opening Emptying
Take out the insert.

Lighter

Press on the cover.

Emptying
Press on the cover.
Take out the insert.
Push in the lighter.
Lighter
The lighter can be removed as
Push in the lighter. soon as it pops back out.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth
Danger of burns erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth Switch off the ignition and take the remote con
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con children cannot use the lighter and burn them
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that selves.
children cannot use the lighter and burn them
selves.

148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Interior equipment Controls

Rear Connecting electrical devices


Opening Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.

Front center console: manual


Press on the cover. transmission

Emptying
Take out the insert.

Lighter

Press on the cover.


Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Front center console: automatic


transmission
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.

Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Take the remote control with you when leaving
the vehicle so that children cannot use the
lighter and burn themselves. Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Interior equipment

Center armrest Through-loading system


General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40. The sides can be folded
down separately or together.

Opening
Remove cover.
Move the front seats to an upright position
Before folding down the rear backrests,
Rear center console
ensure that the front seats are moved forward
slightly and are in an upright position. Other
wise, the head restraint and screen could be
damaged.

1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt


in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. rear window shelf.

In the front passenger footwell

3. Push the corresponding head restraint


down as far as it will go.
Socket is located below the glove compartment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.

In the cargo area


The socket is located in the cover of the loading
lip.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.

150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Interior equipment Controls

4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo Ski bag


area to release the rear seat backrest.
Capacity
The ski bag can be used to transport up to four
pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m or,
depending on the binding, up to two snow
boards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag


1. Fold open the center armrest on the inside.
2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for pressing the button.
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.

3. Lay out the ski bag.


4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
Closing sharp edges of the skis.
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en
gaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure that
it locks in place securely. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or
evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehi
cle occupants.

2. Release the latch plate from the fixture on


the rear window shelf and insert it into the
belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure
you hear the latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 164, with nets or
draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing
eyes.

151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Interior equipment

5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle. More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from your service center.

6. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bag


Secure the ski bag by tightening the re
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu
vers.

Removing the ski bag


The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry
quickly or to use other inserts.

1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag


out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo area.

152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment
All standard, country-specific and optional
Front passenger side
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
Opening
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail
able in the vehicle interior:
Glove compartment on the driver's and front Pull the handle.
passenger side, refer to page 153. The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Storage compartment on the center con
sole: manual transmission. Close the glove compartment again im
Storage compartment, refer to page 156, in mediately
the center console for remote control: auto Close the glove compartment immediately after
matic transmission. use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
Storage compartment in the center armrest, during accidents.
refer to page 154, in the front and rear.
Compartments in the doors. Closing
Pockets on the backrests of the front seats. Fold up the cover.

Net in the front passenger footwell.


USB interface for data transfer
No loose objects in the passenger com
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in
stance during braking and avoidance maneu
vers.

Connection for importing and exporting data on


USB devices, e.g.:
Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
Music collection, refer to page 207.

153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Storage compartments

Observe the following when connecting: Opening


Do not use force when plugging the con
nector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect USB hard drives.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.

Driver's side
Press the button.

Opening
Locking the storage compartment

Pull the handle.


The storage compartment in the armrest can be
Close the glove compartment again im locked with an integrated key to separately se
mediately cure the trunk lid, refer to page 40, for example.
Close the glove compartment immediately after
After the storage compartment is locked, the re
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
mote control can be handed out without the
during accidents.
integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at
a hotel.
Closing
This prevents access to the storage compart
Fold up the cover. ment and to the cargo area.

Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.

154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Storage compartments Controls

Connection for an external audio Cupholders


device
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain
This can be used to connect an external audio
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam
device, such as an MP3 player.
age.
AUX-IN port, refer to page 212.
USB audio interface, refer to page 213. Front: manual transmission

Rear On the center console


The center armrest contains a storage compart
ment.

Folding down

To open: press the button.


The insert folds out.
To use as a storage compartment, fold the insert
back in.
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Front: automatic transmission
Opening

To open: press on the cover.


Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.

155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Controls Storage compartments

Rear Remote control storage compartment


In the front center armrest.

Storage is possible in a vertical position in the


The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ center armrest.
ent container sizes.
To open: press the button.
To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired po Clothes hooks
sition. The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
To close: fold all the way closed. The cupholder handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
must be closed before it can be opened fully. rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
Remote control storage hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
compartment vision.

Opening No heavy objects


Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas
sengers during braking and evasive maneu
vers.

Storage compartments in the


cargo area
Press on the cover. Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
side of the cargo area.
To transport larger objects, it can be pushed
down.

Multi-function hook
A multi-function hook is available on the left
cargo area wall.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Storage compartments Controls

Light and suitable objects only


Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
objects flying about during braking and evasive
maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.

Storage compartment under the cargo


floor panel

Raise the cargo floor panel.

Storage compartment on the side


A storage compartment is located at the side of
the cargo area.

Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 164, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving


Vehicle equipment Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km.
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is Brake system
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
ment or country variant. This also applies for
and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in
safety-related functions and systems.
period.

Clutch
Breaking-in period
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
General information
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to engage the clutch gently.
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a Following part replacement
long vehicle life and good economy. The same breaking in procedures should be ob
served if any of the components mentioned
Engine and differential above have to be renewed in the course of the
Always obey the official speed limit. vehicle's operating life.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road General driving notes
speed:
For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and Closing the trunk lid
100 mph/160 km/h. Drive with the trunk lid closed
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the Only drive with the tailgate closed; other
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
miles. evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be passenger compartment.
increased.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
Tires
Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac Greatly increase the blower speed.
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe Drive moderately.
riod.

160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hot exhaust system external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec


tronics and mobile communication devices can
Hot exhaust system
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
High temperatures are generated in the assurance that the radiation generated during
exhaust system. transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
Do not remove the heat shields installed and interior.
never apply undercoating to them. When driv
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care Hydroplaning
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
haust system and any highly flammable materi
form between the tires and road surface.
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan
personal injury as well as property damage. ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
is the danger of getting burned.
steer and brake the vehicle.

Climate control windshield Hydroplaning


When driving on wet or slushy roads, re
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water


Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita
tions
The marked area is not covered with heat re
flective coating. Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
trical systems and the transmission may be
for electronic toll collection, etc.
damaged.

Climate control laminated tinted safety Braking safely


glass
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
The vehicle glass provides full protection feature.
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
skin.
way of braking in situations when this is neces
sary.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
Mobile communication devices in the ve of steering effort.
hicle
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the active mode.
vehicle without connecting them directly to the

161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Objects in the area around the pedals Avoid load on the brakes
No objects in the area around the pedals Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
sibly even brake failure.
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving Do not drive in neutral
Do not place additional floor mats over existing Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
mats or other objects. stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
Only use floor mats that have been approved for addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. with the engine stopped.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for Brake disc corrosion
example. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
Driving in wet conditions Low mileage.
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly Extended periods when the vehicle is not
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every used at all.
few miles.
Infrequent use of the brakes.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
road users.
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
The heat generated in this process helps dry the applications to clean the discs is not reached.
brake discs and pads.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
In this way braking efficiency will be available brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef
when you need it. fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Hills Condensation under the parked vehicle


Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear When using the automatic climate control, con
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, densation water develops that exits underneath
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a the vehicle.
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
Manual transmission: vehicle are normal.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Automatic transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto
matic transmission, refer to page 72.

162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Loading Driving tips

Loading
Vehicle equipment hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
All standard, country-specific and optional
2. Determine the combined weight of the
equipment that is offered in the model series is
driver and passengers that will be riding in
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
your vehicle.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
ment or country variant. This also applies for and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
safety-related functions and systems. pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
General information For example, if the YYY amount equals
Overloading the vehicle 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying able cargo and luggage load capacity is
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in
creases the rate at which damage develops in 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
of tire inflation pressure. weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
No fluids in the trunk in Step 4.
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Load

Determining the load limit

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of


the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
1. Locate the following statement on your ve less cargo that can be transported.
hicles placard:
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve

163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving tips Loading

Stowing cargo Securing cargo


Smaller and lighter items: secure with re
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
Always position and secure the cargo as
as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
area separating wall.
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not becomes necessary.
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
belts in the opposite buckle.
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
Cover sharp edges and corners. thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu
stow cargo. pants.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
Place protective material around any sharp- Roof-mounted luggage rack
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is Note
in motion. Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Attachment
Securing cargo Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Roof drip rail with flaps

To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes


in the cargo area The anchorage points are located in the roof drip
rail above the doors.

164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Loading Driving tips

Fold the cover outward.

Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not be too large in area.
Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot
tom.
Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps.
Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen
tly.

165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving tips Saving fuel

Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close the windows and glass
All standard, country-specific and optional sunroof
equipment that is offered in the model series is Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment open results in increased air resistance and
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, raises fuel consumption.
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
General information Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
ing on a long trip.
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis
sions. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif
tire wear.
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv
ing style and regular maintenance can have an Drive away without delay
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi
ronmental impact. Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove unnecessary cargo This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts Look well ahead when driving


following use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
driving ahead of you.
racks which are no longer required following
use. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds


Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en
gine speeds.

166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Saving fuel Driving tips

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the Have maintenance carried out
highest applicable gear and drive with the en
gine speed as low as possible and at a constant Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
speed. optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
ice center.
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys
The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indicates
tem, refer to page 288.
the most fuel efficient gear.

Use coasting conditions ECO PRO


When approaching a red light, take your foot off The concept
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
celerator and let the vehicle roll. control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. control output, are adjusted.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
Switch off the engine during that optimizes fuel consumption.
longer stops The extension of the range that is achieved as a
result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic Activating ECO PRO
congestion.
Button should be pressed and held until
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
ECO PRO is displayed in the instru
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
ment cluster.
The Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function of
your vehicle automatically switches off the en
gine during a stop. Display in the instrument cluster

ECO PRO bonus range


Switch off any functions that An extension of the range can be
achieved by an adjusted driving
are not currently needed style.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win This is displayed as the bonus
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con range in the instrument cluster.
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic. Driving style
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are In the tachometer, a mark in the
not actually needed. bar indicator indicates the cur
rent efficiency of the driving style
corresponding to the accelerator
pedal position.

167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Driving tips Saving fuel

Blue display: efficient driving style as long as 3. "Configure ECO PRO"


the mark moves within the blue range. 4. Configure the program.
Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all con
ditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are
met.

ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction


The arrow indicates that the driv
ing style can be adjusted to be
more fuel efficient by backing off
the accelerator. ECO PRO Tip
"ECO PRO limit:":
Additional symbols
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
Symbol Measure
"ECO PRO speed warning":
For efficient driving style, back off the
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
accelerator.
speed is exceeded.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
ECO PRO climate control
PRO speed.
"ECO PRO climate control"
Automatic transmission: switch from The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi
S to D or avoid manual shift interven cient.
tions. The following settings are optimized:
Manual shift transmission: follow Cooling or heat output of the automatic cli
shifting instructions. mate control
Exterior mirror heating
Manual shift transmission: engage
Seat heating
neutral for engine stop.

ECO PRO Potential


Configuring ECO PRO The percentage of potential savings that can be
1. "Settings" achieved with the current configuration is dis
played.
2. "Driving mode"
Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol
ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. "Vehicle Info"

168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Saving fuel Driving tips

2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history


The average fuel consumption can be displayed
within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption history


time frame
Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history


1. "Options" Open.
2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics info


The current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics Info"
The following systems are displayed:
Automatic engine start/stop function.
Energy recovery.
Climate control output.

169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Navigation Navigation

Navigation
Vehicle equipment Destination input
All standard, country-specific and optional
Manual destination entry
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
General information
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip The system supports you in entering street
ment or country variant. This also applies for names and house numbers by automatically
safety-related functions and systems. completing the entry and providing entry com
parisons, refer to page 21.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
Navigation system up quickly.
If the existing entries should not be changed,
General information the entries for the state/province and town/
The navigation system can determine the pre city can be skipped.
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat Destination guidance is started to the town/
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably city center if no street is entered.
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can Entering a state/province
be updated. 1. "Navigation"
Entries in stationary vehicle 2. "Enter address"
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.

Starting navigation system 3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed


state/province.
1. Press the button on the controller.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be ac
cessed directly with the button on the con
troller.

172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Entering a town/city 3. Select the street.


1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis
played town/city. Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
Street does not exist in the destination
The list is narrowed down further with each city/town
entry.
The desired street does not exist in the specified
3. Move the controller to the right. city/town because it belongs to another part of
4. Select the town/city name from the list. the city/town.
If there are several towns/cities with the same 1. "Navigation"
name:
2. "Enter address"
1. Change to the list of town/city names. 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Highlight the town/city. 4. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the town/city. 5. Select "In" the displayed country.
All streets of the selected state/province are
Entering the postal code
offered. The associated town/city is dis
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis played after the street name.
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection


6. Select the letters.
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
7. Change to the list of street names.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city. 8. Highlight the street.
If there are several streets with the same name: 9. Select the street.

1. Change to the list of street names.


2. Highlight the street.

173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Starting destination guidance after 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing


entering the destination contact"
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 179.

Address book

Selecting a destination from the


address book 6. Select an existing contact, if available.
1. "Navigation" 7. "Business address" or "Home address"
2. "Address book" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
Contacts with addresses are displayed if name".
these have been checked as destinations. 9. "Store in vehicle"
If the mobile phone does not display the
contacts with addresses, they must first be Storing the position
checked as a destination, refer to The current position can be stored in the ad
page 252. dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with


"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address


book 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex
isting contact from the list. Select the type
After entering the destination, store the desti
of address and enter the first and last names.
nation in the address book.
5. "Store in vehicle"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" Editing or deleting an address
3. "Guidance" 1. "Navigation"
4. "Options" Open. 2. "Address book"

174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

3. Highlight the entry. Starting destination guidance


4. "Options" Open. 1. "Navigation"
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry" 2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
Using the home address as the
4. "Start guidance"
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the Editing the destination
home address, refer to page 251.
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"
2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the destination.
3. "Home" 4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations


1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
4. "Start guidance" destinations"

Last destinations Special destinations

At a glance Opening the search for special


The destinations previously entered are stored destinations
automatically. To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or
The destinations can be called up and used as a tourist attractions:
destination for destination guidance. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Calling up the last destination
3. Select the search function.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations" Online Search
1. "Google Local Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"

175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

A-Z search controller to the left to leave the category


1. "A-Z search" details.

2. "Town/City" 6. "Start search"


Select or enter the town/city. A list of the special destinations is displayed.

3. "Category" 7. Select a special destination.

4. Select the category. Details are displayed.

5. "Category details" If multiple details are stored, you can leaf


through the pages.
For some special destinations, multiple cat
egory details can be selected. Move the If a phone number is available, a connection
controller to the left to leave the category can be established if necessary.
details. 8. Select the symbol.
6. "Keyword" "Start guidance" or "Add as another
7. Enter the keyword. destination"

A list of the special destinations is displayed. Add a destination as a further destination,


refer to page 179.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed. Display of special destinations
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf List of special destinations: special destinations
through the pages. are organized by distance and are displayed with
If a phone number is available, a connection a directional arrow to the special destination.
can be established if necessary. on the split screen, special destinations of the
9. Select the symbol. selected category are displayed in the map view
"Start guidance" or "Add as another as symbols. The display depends on the scale
destination" of the map and the category.

Add a destination as a further destination,


Destination entry via BMW Assist
refer to page 179.
A connection is established to the Concierge
"Start search": if a search term is not entered, service, refer to page 254.
the search is repeated with the previous search
term. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
Category search
3. "Options" Open.
1. "Category search"
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city. Displaying special destinations in the
3. "Category" map
4. Select the category. To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat 1. "Navigation"
egory details can be selected. Move the 2. "Map"
3. "Options" Open.

176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

4. "Display Points of Interest"


5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map

Selecting the destination


1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is indi Select the symbol.
cated on the map.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
3. "Interactive map" destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 179.
"Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
"View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
"Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
To change the scale: turn the controller.
"Find points of interest": the search for spe
To shift the map: move the controller in
cial destinations is started.
the required direction.
To shift the map diagonally: move the Destination entry by voice
controller in the required direction and
turn it. General information
Instructions for voice activation system, re
Specifying the street fer to page 22.
If the system does not recognize a street, one of
When making a destination entry by voice,
the following is displayed:
you can change between voice operation
The name of a street in the vicinity. and iDrive.
The county. To have the available spoken instructions
The coordinates of the destination. read out loud: Voice commands

Additional functions Saying the entries


Additional functions are available on the inter the town/city, street, and house number can
active map after the controller is pressed. be entered as a single command.
Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in
tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 87.

177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Example: to enter a town/city in a US state To select a different town/city: New


as a whole word, the language of the system entry
must be English. Select an entry: Entry ... e.g., entry 2
Spell the entry if the spoken language and To spell an entry: Spell city
the language of the system differ.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag the system.
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
If there are several towns/cities with the same
lengthy pauses between the letters.
name:
The options available for entering data de
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
pend on the navigation data and the country
list and displayed as one location followed by an
and language settings.
ellipsis.
entering an address using a command 1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ... e.g., En
try 2.
1. Press the button on the steering 2. Select the desired town/city.
wheel.
2. Enter address Entering a street or intersection
3. Wait for a request from the system. separately
4. Say the address in the suggested order. Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Entering a house number separately
If necessary, individually name the separate
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
components of the address, e.g., the town/city.
house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en
tered.
Entering a town/city separately
The name of the town/city can be said as a 1. House number
word or spelled out. 2. Say the house number.
With the destination entry menu displayed: Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
1. Press the button on the steering the system.
wheel.
2. City or Spell city. Planning a trip with intermediate
destinations
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
New trip
4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
the first three letters.
destinations.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit
ies may be suggested. 1. "Navigation"

5. Select the town/city. 2. "Map"

To select a recommended town/ 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.


city: Yes 4. "Guidance"

178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

5. "Enter new destination" Store the trip


6. Select the type of destination entry. Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1. "Options" Open.
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the name.
4. "OK"

Select the stored trip


7. Enter the intermediate destination. 1. "Navigation"
8. "Start guidance" 2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
Entering intermediate destinations 4. "Start guidance"
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip. Reversing the direction of travel
1. "Enter new destination" Intermediate destinations are displayed in re
verse order in the list.
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination. 1. "Map"
4. "Add as another destination" 2. "Guidance"
The intermediate destination is entered in 3. "Options" Open.
the destination list and is highlighted. 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located in the desired position Intermediate destination options
in the list. 1. "Map"
6. Press the controller. 2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
Starting the trip
4. Select an intermediate destination.
1. After all intermediate destinations are en
tered, highlight the first destination. "Edit destination"

If the second destination, for example, is "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
highlighted when destination guidance is intermediate destination to another po
started, the first destination is skipped. sition in the list.

2. "Start guidance" "Delete dest. in the trip"

This symbol marks the active leg of the "Go to next dest. in the trip"
trip. Some options are not available for certain trips.

Delete the stored trip


1. "Stored trips"
2. Highlight the desired trip.

179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

3. "Options" Open. The route criteria can be changed when the


4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip" destination is entered and during destina
tion guidance.
Open the last trip Road types are part of the navigation data
1. "Navigation" and are taken into consideration when plan
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
2. "Stored trips"
The recommended route may differ from the
3. "Last trip"
route you would take based on personal ex
4. "Start guidance" perience.
The settings are stored for the remote con
trol currently in use.
Destination guidance Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 186.
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation" Changing the route criteria
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 172. 1. "Navigation"
3. "Accept destination" 2. "Map"
4. "Start guidance" 3. "Route preference"
The route is shown on the Control Display. 4. Select the criterion:
The distance to the destination/intermedi "Fast route": time-optimized route,
ate destination and the estimated time of ar being a combination of the shortest pos
rival are displayed in the map view. sible route and the fastest roads.
The arrow view is shown in the instrument "ECO PRO route": optimized com
cluster, in the Head-up Display, and on the bination of the fastest and shortest
Control Display where appropriate. route.
"Short route": short distance, irre
Terminating destination guidance
spective of how fast or slow progress will
1. "Navigation" be.
2. "Map" "Alternative routes": if available, alter
3. "Guidance" native routes are suggested during ac
4. "Stop guidance" tive route guidance.

Continuing destination guidance


If the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information
The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.

180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

The individual suggestions are high Street name at the next change in direction.
lighted in color.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
Solid triangle: best lane.
Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an
other lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying list of route sections


When the destination guidance is started, a list
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if of route sections can be displayed. The driving
necessary: distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for
"Avoid highways": highways are each route section.
avoided wherever possible.
1. "Navigation"
"Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
2. "Route information"
wherever possible.
3. Highlight route section.
"Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible. The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Route
Bypassing a section of the route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance: Calculate a new route for a route section.
Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on 1. "Navigation"
the Control Display. 2. "Route information"
List of route sections. 3. "New route for"
Map view, refer to page 182.
Arrow view in the Head-up Display., refer to
page 137

Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
Large arrow: current direction of travel.
Street name of the currently traveled street.
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo
Small arrow: indicates the next change in di
meters within which you would like to return
rection.
to the original route.
Intersection view.
5. Press the controller.
Lane information.
Traffic bulletins.
Distance to the next change in direction.

181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Resuming the original route Volume of spoken instructions


If the route section should no longer be by Turn the volume button while giving an instruc
passed: tion until the desired volume is set.
1. "Navigation"
Saving the spoken instructions on the
2. "Route information" programmable memory buttons
3. "New route for:" The function for switching the spoken instruc
4. "Remove blocking" tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 20, for quick ac
Gas station recommendation cess.
The remaining range is calculated, and if nec
essary gas stations along the route are dis
played. Map view
1. "Navigation" Selecting the map view
2. "Route information" 1. "Navigation"
3. "Recommended refuel" 2. "Map"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station. At a glance
The position of the gas station is displayed
on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta
tion is added to the route.
1 Function bar
Switching spoken instructions on/off 2 Route section with traffic obstruction
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
rently in use.
4 Planned route
1. "Navigation"
5 Current location
2. "Map"
6 Upper status field
3. "Voice instructions"
7 Lower status field

Repeating spoken instructions


1. "Navigation" Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different col
2. "Map"
ors and styles depending on their classification.
3. Highlight the symbol. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con
4. Press the controller twice. nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines.

182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Traffic obstructions To change to the function bar, move the con


Small triangles along the planned route indicate troller to the left.
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian Changing the map section
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction. "Interactive map"
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the To shift the map: move the controller in the
obstruction. required direction.
Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the To shift the map diagonally: move the con
planned route or direction. troller in the required direction and turn it.
Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction. Changing the scale
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 184. 1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan Automatically scaled map scale
ned route is displayed on the map. In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis
Status fields played. The map shows the entire route be
Show/hide: press the controller. tween the current location and the destination.
Upper status field: time, telephone, and en
Settings for the map view
tertainment details.
The settings are stored for the remote control
Lower status field: symbol for active desti
currently in use.
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Function bar
3. "Options" Open.
The following functions are available in the func
4. "Settings"
tion bar:
Set the map view.
Symbol Function
"Day/night mode"
Start/end destination guidance. Select and create the necessary settings
Switch spoken instructions on/ depending on the light conditions.
off. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
Change the route criteria.
"Satellite images"
Search for a special destination. Depending on availability and resolution,
Display traffic bulletins. satellite images are displayed in a scale of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
Interactive map. 1,000 km.
Set the map view. "Perspective view in 3D"

Change the scale.

183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Prominent areas that are contained in the time traffic information. If your system has
navigation data are displayed on the map in this capability the following additional terms
3D. and conditions apply:
"Traffic conditions/gray map" An End-User shall no longer have the right
The map is optimized for displaying traffic to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
bulletins, refer to page 184. Symbols for the End-User is in material breach of the terms
special destinations are no longer displayed. and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Map view for split screen Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic
The map view can be selected for the split Network) holds the rights to the traffic in
screen independently from the main screen. cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
1. "Options" Open. copy, scan or use any other method to re
2. "Split screen" produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly distribute in any way any portion of traffic in
until the split screen is selected. cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Net
5. Select the map view. work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
"Arrow display" any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
"Map facing north"
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in
"Map direction of travel" cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
"Map view with perspective" your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
"Position" unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
"Exit ramp view": selected blind drive
ways are displayed three dimensionally. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Setting in some cases will affect the dis
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
play in the Head-Up Display.
suppliers make no representations about
"Traffic conditions/gray map" content, traffic and road conditions, route
6. To change the scale: select the split screen usability, or speed.
and turn the controller. C. The licensed material is provided to li
censee as is, and where is. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
Traffic bulletins and all third party providers of any of the li
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
At a glance fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta or representations with respect to the li
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa censed material (including, without limita
tion of a traffic information service. Informa tion, that the licensed material will be error-
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is free, will operate without interruption or that
updated continuously. the traffic data will be accurate), express, im
plied or statutory, including, without limita
Certain BMW models equipped with navi
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta
gation have the capability to display real-

184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

bility, non-infringement fitness for a "More information": display additional


particular purpose, or those arising from a information.
course of dealing or usage of trade. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or if required.
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci Traffic bulletins on the map
dental damages (including, without limita "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indication
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or on the control display is switched to shades of
profits relating to the same) arising from any gray. This enables a better view of the traffic
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of bulletins. Day/night mode is not taken into ac
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net count in this setting. Symbols and special des
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the tinations are not displayed.
possibility of such damages. These limita
tions apply to all claims, including, without 1. "Navigation"
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such 2. "Map"
as negligence, product liability and strict li 3. "Options" Open.
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen 4. "Settings"
tial damages, so those particular limitations 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
may not apply to you.
The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map Symbols in the map view
by symbols. Depending on the scale of the map and the lo
The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
are stored in a list. the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis
played.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
Additional information in the map view
that affect the calculated route.
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
Switching the reception on/off
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
1. "Navigation" calculated route.
2. "Options" Open. Red: congestion.
3. "Receive Traffic Info" Orange: stop-and-go traffic.
Yellow: heavy traffic.
Opening the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation" Green: clear roads.

2. "Map" Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc


tion site.
3. "Traffic Info"
The displayed information depends on the par
First the traffic bulletins for the calculated ticular traffic information service.
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted by their distance from the current po
sition of the vehicle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.

185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

Filtering traffic bulletins detour is offered. In addition, distance and time


You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the differences between the original route and the
map. detour are displayed.
To accept the detour:
1. "Navigation"
"Detour"
2. "Map"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
3. "Options" Open.
the road, a message is displayed without a de
4. "Traffic Info categories" tour suggestion.
5. Select the desired categories. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes
sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance


Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis The route is automatically changed in the event
played on the map. of traffic obstructions.
Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route The system does not point out traffic ob
are always shown. structions along the original route.
For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
tify you of potentially dangerous situations, the map.
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid
Depending on road type and the kind and
den.
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu
lated route may lead through the traffic ob
Destination guidance with traffic
struction.
bulletins
Dangerous situations are displayed regard
Detour suggestions from the navigation system
less of the setting.
can be manually accepted in the semi-dynamic
destination guidance. In the dynamic destina To activate dynamic destination guidance:
tion guidance, they are automatically accepted 1. "Navigation"
in the route guidance.
2. "Options" Open.
Semi-dynamic destination guidance 3. "Dynamic guidance"
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
Navigation data
available traffic information into account. A mes
Information on the navigation data
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. 1. "Navigation"
When there is a traffic obstruction, if possible, a 2. "Options" Open.

186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Navigation Navigation

3. "Navigation system version": information on tion. Reception is usually best when you
the data version is displayed. have an unobstructed view of the sky.
The destination without street information is
Updating the navigation data not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
General information
be determined.
Navigation data and authorization codes are
Input any street in the selected city and start
available from your service center. Navigation
destination guidance.
data are stored in the vehicle and can be up
dated. The destination is not used for route guid
ance?
Depending on the data volume, a data up
date may take several hours. The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
Update during the trip to preserve battery.
as close as possible to the original.
During the update, only the basic functions
Letters for destination input cannot be se
of the navigation system are available.
lected?
The status of the update can be viewed.
The stored data do not contain the data of
The system restarts after the update. the destination.
The data carrier with the navigation data can Select a goal that is as close as possible to
be removed after the update is complete. the original.
Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
Perform an update
"Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
cation on the control display is switched to
player with the labeled side facing up.
shades of gray. This enables a better view of
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis the traffic bulletins.
play.
Spoken instructions are no longer output
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga during route guidance in front of intersec
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. tions?
After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
tions on the Control Display. you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal
Viewing the status culate a new route suggestion.

1. Press the button.


2. "Navigation update"

What to do if...
The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi

187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Entertainment Tone

Tone
Vehicle equipment 3. Select the desired tone settings.

All standard, country-specific and optional


equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

General information 4. To adjust: turn the controller.

The sound settings are stored for the remote 5. To store: press the controller.
control currently in use.

Equalizer
Treble, bass, balance, and Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
fader
Adjusting the equalizer
"Treble": treble adjustment.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
"Bass": depth adjustment.
2. "Tone"
"Balance": left/right volume distribution.
3. "Equalizer"
"Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
4. Select the desired setting.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"

5. To adjust: turn the controller.


6. To store: press the controller.

190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Tone Entertainment

Multi-channel playback, Adjusting the volume


surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play
back, surround. 3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

5. To adjust: turn the controller.


6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings


When surround is activated, multi-channel play
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
played. 2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"

Volume
"Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
"Gong": volume of the signal, e. g., the safety
belt reminder, compared to the entertain
ment sound output.
"Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".

191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Radio

Radio
Vehicle equipment AM/FM station
All standard, country-specific and optional
Selecting a station
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment 1. "Radio"
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, 2. "FM" or "AM"
e. g., because of the selected optional equip 3. Select the desired station.
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

All saved stations are stored for the remote con


trol currently in use.

Changing the station


Press the button.
1 Change entertainment sources
2 Change station/track
3 Programmable memory buttons Storing a station
4 Volume, on/off 1. "Radio"
5 Change wave band 2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.

Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.

Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the 4. Press the controller for an extended period.
radio. 5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Radio Entertainment

The stations can also be stored on the program HD Radio reception


mable memory buttons, refer to page 20. Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
Selecting a station manually
License conditions
Station selection via the frequency.
HD Radio technology manufactured under li
1. "Radio" cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For
2. "FM" or "AM" eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq
3. "Manual"
uity Digital Corp.
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur
rently in use.
To store the station: press the controller for an This symbol is displayed in the status line
extended period. when the audio signal is digital.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
RDS received in digital mode, the playback switches
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as between analog and digital reception. Due to
the station name, in the FM wave band. time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
Switching the RDS on/off digital radio reception.
1. "Radio"
Displaying additional information
2. "FM"
Some stations broadcast additional information
3. "Options" Open.
on the current track, such as the name of the ar
4. "RDS" tist.

1. Select the desired station.


2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
The setting is stored for the remote control cur names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
rently in use. 1. Select the desired station.

193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Radio

2. Press the controller. Symbol Function


3. Select the substation.
Open the My Favorites category/
When reception is poor, the substation is muted open a favorite.
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, it switches back to the Manage the favorites.
main station.
Traffic Jump

Weather Band The functions of the navigation bar symbols can


also be stored on the programmable memory
General information buttons, refer to page 20.

The availability of the Weather Band and the


Managing a subscription
number of available channels can vary depend
ing on the region. To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
Switching on the Weather Band at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
1. "Radio"
status line.
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel. Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
Additional information all disabled channels.
Weather Band is a service of the National Oce
1. "Radio"
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
Additional information on the Internet: 2. "Satellite radio"
www.nws.noaa.gov. 3. "Category"

Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele
phone.

Navigation bar overview 4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate


gory.
Symbol Function
5. Select the desired channel.
Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Radio Entertainment

The phone number and an electronic serial Via iDrive


number, ESN, are displayed. 1. "Radio"
6. Select the phone number to have the chan 2. "Satellite radio"
nel enabled.
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again


via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels


Via the buttons on the center console
1. "Radio"
Press the button.
2. "Satellite radio"
The next channel is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
2. "Satellite radio"
number, ESN, are displayed.
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan
sired category.
nels.
4. Select the desired channel.
Selecting channels 5. Press the controller again.
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.

195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Radio

6. Press the controller again to confirm the is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf
highlighted channel. fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function


1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"

7. Select the desired memory location.


The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
The red arrow shows the current playback
Changing the list view position.
The list view changes every time the first symbol The time difference to the live broadcast is
on the navigation bar is pressed. displayed next to the buffer bar.
Information on the channel is displayed. For live transmissions: "live".
Symbol Meaning
Timeshift menu
Channel name

Artist Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast


Track
Playback/pause
Selecting a category Next track
1. "Radio"
Previous track
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category" Fast forward
4. Select the desired category. Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac


Timeshift
tivated
Approx. one hour of the program being broad
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must Automatic timeshift
be available. When the function is activated, audio playback
The stored audio track can be played with a de is stopped automatically in the event of:
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
Activation of the voice activation system.

196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Radio Entertainment

Muting. 4. "Add sports information"


The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
5. Select the league.
Storing favorites 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, Opening the favorites
league, and team. If an activated favorite is played back, the fol
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec
Storing the artist, track, or game onds: "Favorite alert!".
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur "Favorites"
rently being broadcast. The channel information Select the symbol while the message is shown.
must be available.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
The displayed favorite is played.
Storing the league or team If there is no message, the system changes to
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
from a selection list. being broadcast can be selected from a list.
1. "Radio"
Managing the favorites
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites" Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor
ites.

197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Radio

The setting is stored for the remote control cur Automatic update
rently in use. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
Deleting favorites takes place automatically and may take several
1. "Satellite radio" minutes.
2. "Manage favorites"
Notes
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
Reception may not be available in some sit
4. Open "Options".
uations, such as under certain environmen
5. "Delete entry" tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
Traffic Jump The signal may not be available in tunnels or
Traffic and weather information for a selected underground garages next to tall buildings
region is broadcast every few minutes. or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Stored stations
3. Open "Options".
General information
4. "Set jump"
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur Calling up a station
rently in use. 1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Activating/deactivating the jump
3. Select the desired station.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Storing a station
3. "Jump to:" The station currently selected is stored.
Information for the selected region is broadcast
1. "Radio"
as soon as it is available.
2. "Presets"
A new panel opens.
3. "Store station"
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad


cast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic


Jump.
4. Select the desired memory location.

198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Radio Entertainment

The list of stored stations is stored for the re


mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program
mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. "Options" Open.
5. "Delete entry"

199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment CD/DVD
All standard, country-specific and optional
Playback
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
Loading the CD/DVD player
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
ment or country variant. This also applies for Playback begins automatically.
safety-related functions and systems. Reading can take a few minutes with com
pressed audio files.

Controls Starting playback


A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or
DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

1 Change the entertainment source


2 CD/DVD drive
3 Eject CD/DVD
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
6 Volume, on/off
Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player
Sound output ... DVD changer

Switching on/off CD/DVD player, rear


When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio. Playable formats
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
Muting
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
When the ignition is switched on or the engine audio (video part only), DVD video.
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD,
radio.
SVCD.

200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, To go up a level in the directory: move the
M4A. controller to the left.

CD/DVD removal

1. Press the button.


The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button 2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track is played.

Selecting a track via iDrive

Audio CDs

Displaying information on the track

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files


Depending on the data, some letters and num
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor
rectly. If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
1. Select the directory if necessary. Interpret.
Album track.
Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
File name of track.

Random playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"

201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

3. Select the desired CD or DVD. Code Region


4. "Options" Open.
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
5. "Random"
6 China

0 All regions

Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con
trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans
mission is in position P.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: All
tracks in the selected directory are played in DVD video
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched 2. "CD/DVD"
off. 3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.

Automatic repeat
The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto
matically.

Video playback

Country codes VCD/SVCD


Only DVDs with the code of the home region can 1. "CD/Multimedia"
be played back; also refer to the information on 2. "CD/DVD"
the DVD.
3. Select a CD with video content.
Code Region 4. "Select track"
1 USA, Canada 5. Select the desired track.

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af


Video menu
rica
To open the video menu: turn the controller dur
3 Southeast Asia ing playback.
4 Australia, Central and South America, Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
New Zealand

202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Symbol Function 3. "Audio/language"

Open the DVD menu.

Start playback.

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter
4. Select the desired language.
Fast forward

Reverse Selecting the subtitles


The subtitles that are available depend on the
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev DVD.
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start 1. Turn the controller during playback.
playback.
2. Open "Options".
DVD menu 3. "Subtitles"
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
video menu. display subtitles".
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.

DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via Setting the brightness, contrast and color
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on 1. Turn the controller during playback.
the DVD.
2. Open "Options".
Selecting the language 3. "Display settings"
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.


2. Open "Options".

203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color" Selecting the camera angle


The availability of a different camera angle de
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback.


2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting Opening the main menu, back
is reached and press the controller. These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
Selecting the zoom use.
Display the video image on the entire screen.
DVD changer
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options". In the glove compartment
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"

Pull down the release cover.


The DVD changer tilts down.
To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en
Selecting a track gages.
DVD video:
Fold up the DVD changer
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed. Always fold the DVD changer back up after
filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVD
2. Open "Options". changer could be damaged.
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.

204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Controls and displays 2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the vacant compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
1 Empty DVD compartments
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
2 LED on DVD slot able to eject again.
3 Buttons for DVD compartments
After they are inserted, it may take several mi
4 DVD slot nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
5 Fill DVD compartments
Removing a single CD/DVD
Filling the DVD compartments
1. Press the button.
individually
2. Select the DVD compartment.
1. Press the button. The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
The LED on the first empty compartment 3. Remove the CD/DVD.
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary. Removing all CDs/DVDs
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
1. Hold the button down.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment. Malfunctions
Sliding in CDs/DVDs If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs idly, a malfunction has occurred.
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ To eliminate the malfunction:
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
1. Press one of the buttons:
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this

may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.

Filling all empty DVD compartments
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
1. Hold the button down. 2. Remove the CD/DVD.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments The DVD changer is functional again after the
flash. LEDs stop flashing rapidly.

205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Audio playback Notes


The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve CD/DVD player and changer
hicle. Do not remove the cover
Only the main film without the previews or extras BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
can be played back. officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
Starting playback severe eye damage may occur.
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia" CDs and DVDs
2. "CD/DVD" Use of CDs/DVDs
3. Select the desired DVD. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be
Selecting a chapter using the button come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar
Press the button repeatedly until the able damage to the device.
desired chapter is played.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
Selecting a chapter using iDrive CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
1. "CD/Multimedia" otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
2. "CD/DVD" and no longer eject.

3. Select the desired DVD. Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
4. Select the desired chapter. longer eject.

Fast forward/reverse
General malfunctions
Press and hold the button. CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
Selecting the language to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
The languages that are available depend on the would be.
DVD. If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
1. "CD/Multimedia" whether it has been inserted correctly.

2. "CD/DVD"
Humidity
3. Select the desired DVD.
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
4. Open "Options". on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
5. "Audio/language" temporarily prevent playback.
6. Select the desired language.

206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg
DVDs istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc.
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
causes:

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs Music collection


Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent Storing music
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD. General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
a pen intended for this purpose.
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
Damage Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com
pressed audio format. If available, informa
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
moisture.
stored as well.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
sunlight. an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
formats are stored. Individual tracks and di
CDs/DVDs with copy protection rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro track and directory, refer to page 211.
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or stored but cannot be played back.
can only be played to a limited extent.
Backing up music data
MACROVISION Regularly back up the music data; other
This product contains copyrighted technology wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
that is based on multiple registered US patents disk.
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Music recognition technology and re
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use lated data are provided by Gracenote.
of this copy protection must be approved by Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec
Macrovision. Media protected by this product - ognition technology and related content deliv
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may ery. For more information, please visit
only be used for private purposes. Copying of www.gracenote.com.
this technology is prohibited.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote
DTS Digital Surround
Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Manufactured under license under U.S. This product and service may practice one or
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
and other patents granted and registered in the #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend 3. "Storing..."


ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD


1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process


1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
The music collection is displayed and the first Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the ning of the track at which storage was inter
storage process, the tracks are played in se rupted.
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc Album information
ess: During storage, information such as the name of
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not the artist is stored with the track, if this informa
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
this will interrupt the storage process. You can CD.
switch to the other audio sources without inter To update the database, contact your service
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the center.
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up. Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con
Interrupting storage
nected to the USB interface in the glove com
1. "CD/Multimedia" partment.
2. "CD/DVD" Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from

208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the 4. Select the desired category.
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 153.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)" 5. Select the desired entry:
Select "A-Z search", refer to page 21,
and input the desired entry.
Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
Playing music by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Music search
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music Restarting the music search
search. Tracks without additional information
"New search"
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 210.
Music search using spoken instructions
1. "CD/Multimedia" Instructions for the voice activation system, re
2. "Music collection" fer to page 22.
3. "Music search"
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Music search
3. Open the desired category, e.g., Select
artist.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: Title ....
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.

209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Current playback The first track is played automatically, if pos


The list of tracks that was generated last by the sible.
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"

4. Change directories if needed to select


tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.

Random playback
4. Select the desired track, if necessary. All tracks of the selection are played back in ran
dom order.
Top 50
1. "CD/Multimedia"
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
2. "Music collection"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
2. "Music collection"
4. "Random"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files


Managing music

1. "CD/Multimedia" Albums
2. "Music collection"
Renaming an album
3. Select the desired album.
The name of the album, if available, is automat
Depending on the album, the tracks or the ically entered when the album is stored. If the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.

210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

name is not available, it can be changed later if Free memory capacity


desired. Display the free memory capacity in the music
1. "CD/Multimedia" collection.
2. "Music collection" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album. 2. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options". 3. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album" 4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection


The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
6. Select the letters individually. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur
ing a long trip.
Deleting an album 1. Starting the engine.
An album cannot be deleted while a track from 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter
that album is being played. face in the glove compartment.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" 4. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album. 5. Open "Options".
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory


A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

6. "Music data import/export" External devices


At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Mobile phone audio interface

7. "Backup music on USB" Bluetooth audio

Rear AUX-IN port on the left

Rear AUX-IN port on the right

AUX-IN port

At a glance
For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
Storing the music collection in the vehicle Recommendation: use medium tone and
When storing from the USB device, the existing volume settings on the audio device. The
music collection in the vehicle is replaced. tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" Connecting
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection


1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection" The AUX-IN port is located in the center armrest.
Connect the headphones or line-out connector
of the device to the jack plug.

212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Playback ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that


1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and are supported by the USB audio interface.
select a track on the audio device. Connection via snap-in adapter when equip
2. "CD/Multimedia" ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or
3. If necessary "External devices".
mobile phones.
4. "AUX front"
Due to the large number of different audio devi
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
Volume that every audio device/mobile phone is opera
The volume of the sound output is dependent ble on the vehicle.
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark
Ask your service center about suitable audio de
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
vices/mobile phones.
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Audio files
Adjusting the volume
Standard audio files can be played back:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
MP3.
2. If necessary "External devices".
WMA.
3. "AUX front"
WAV (PCM).
4. "Volume"
AAC, M4A.
Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via


USB audio interface

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume


is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/mobile phone


audio interface
USB audio interface is located in the center arm
At a glance rest.
It is possible to connect external audio devices. Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone
to the USB interface.
Connectors for external devices The Apple iPod/iPhone menu
Connection via USB audio interface: Apple structure is supported by the
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play USB audio interface.

213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Connection of a USB device via the Playback


USB audio interface 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.

USB audio interface is located in the center arm


rest.

Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect The playback starts with the first track.
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage. On the split screen, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Connect the USB device to the
USB interface. Track search
Selection is possible via:
Playback lists.
Information: type of music, artist, and, if
After connecting for the first time available, composer, album, track.
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type In addition, for USB devices: file directory
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit and, if available, composer.
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
depending on the USB device and the number the Latin alphabet.
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up Starting the track search
via the file directory. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
Number of tracks
3. Select the or symbol.
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve 4. "Search"
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist "Artist".
ing music tracks may be deleted.
All entries are displayed in a list.

Copy protection Open "A-Z search" and input the de


sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man
results are filtered using this letter as the
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.

214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Select the desired entry from the list. 3. "Options" Open.


4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.

Video playback

At a glance
6. Select other categories if you wish. Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible.
Not all categories need to be selected. For Operation can be performed via iDrive. The
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis Playback
played. The video image is displayed on the front Con
7. "Start play" trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
Restarting a track search parking brake is set or if the automatic trans
mission is in position P.
"New search"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Playback lists 2. "External devices"
Calling up playback lists. 3. Select the symbol.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Video"
2. "External devices" 5. Select the directory if necessary.
3. Select the or symbol. To go up a level in the directory: move the
4. "Playlists" controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play
Current playback back.
List of tracks currently being played.
Video menu
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" Symbol Function
3. Select the or symbol. Next video file
4. "Current playback"
Previous video file
Random playback Double-click on an icon to play back
The current list of tracks is played back in ran previous video file.
dom order.
Notes
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en
2. "External devices"
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem

215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

peratures; refer to the audio device operating Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
instructions. page 231, and on the device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the device, such as for a connection without
files may not play back correctly in each case. confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
Information on connection A number with at least four and a maximum
The connected audio device is supplied with of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the key. It is only required once for pairing.
device. Therefore, do not additionally con
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle; Pairing and connecting
otherwise, playback may be compromised.
Pairing a device
Do not use force when plugging the con
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
nector into the USB interface.
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi
Do not connect devices such as fans or cle's occupants and to other road users, only
lamps to the USB audio interface. pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.
Do not connect USB hard drives.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Do not use the USB audio interface to re
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
charge external devices.
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
Bluetooth audio 4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis
At a glance played.
Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 231.
The sound is output on the vehicle loud
speakers.
The volume of the sound output is depend
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device. 5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
Up to four external devices can be paired to the device operating instructions: e.g.
with the vehicle. search for or connect the Bluetooth device
or a new device.
Requirements The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
The device is suitable. Information under on the device display.
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
The device is ready for operation. the device display.
The ignition is switched on. Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the
same Bluetooth passkey.

216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

7. Enter the passkey and confirm. 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".


4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. "Options" Open.
6. "Configure phone"
7. "Audio"
8. "OK"

Connecting the device


8. Select the desired functions with which the 1. "CD/Multimedia"
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio". 2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
9. "OK" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.

If pairing was successful, the device is displayed


as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source. source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 218. Playback

Connecting a specific device General information


A device that has already been paired can be The display of music track information de
connected as an active audio source. pends on the device.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex Operation can takes place on the device or
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue iDrive.
tooth. Playback is interrupted when data is ex
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Requirements Bluetooth.
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi Starting playback
ces. 1. Connect the device.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. "External devices"

217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. Select the symbol. Unpairing a device


1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if...
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec Information on suitable devices can be found at
essary. www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 230.
Playback menu
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
Depending on the particular device, some of the
functions may not be available. Perform a software update, refer to
page 219, if needed.
Symbol Function The device could not be paired or connected.
Next track Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
Fast forward: press and hold the and the vehicle match? Enter the same
symbol. passkey on the device and via iDrive.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Previous music track
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
Disconnecting the audio connection with other devices if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia" Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
2. "Bluetooth (audio)" does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
3. Highlight the desired device.
in adapter or via the charging cable.
4. Open "Options".
Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi
5. "Configure phone" ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
The device no longer reacts? Switch the de
vice off and on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
6. "Audio"
device if necessary.
7. "OK"
Switch the radio off and on again.

218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Music files can only be played back softly. Updating software via USB
Adjust the volume settings on the device. The software may only be updated when the ve
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed hicle is stationary.
or by other messages on the device. 1. Store the file for the software-update in the
Switch off the button tones and other signal main director of a USB flash drive.
tones on the device. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or terface of the USB audio interface in the
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. center armrest. An update via the USB in
Switch the radio off and on again. terface in the glove compartment is not pos
sible.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the 3. "Settings"
extended connectivity of the music player in the 4. "Software update"
mobile phone. 5. "Update software"
Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 218, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With 6. "Start update"
a software update, the vehicle can support new
7. "OK"
cell phones or new external devices.
All listed software updates are installed.
The updating of the software is done via:
USB. Restoring the previous version
Updates and related current information is If it should become necessary, the software ver
available at www.bmw.com/update. sion prior to the last software update can be re
stored.
Displaying the current version
The previous version may only be restored when
The currently installed software is displayed. the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Software update" 2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version" 3. "Restore previous version"
SelectDesired version to displayAdditional in 4. "OK" Double-click.
formation.
All listed software updates are removed.

Note
While the software is being updated or a previ
ous version is being restoredBMW Assist, Office

219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment CD/multimedia

functions and the connected devices are tem


porarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the
functions to become available again.

220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Rear entertainment Entertainment

Rear entertainment
Vehicle equipment 3 On/off, right
All standard, country-specific and optional 4 Headphone connection, right
equipment that is offered in the model series is 5 RCA sockets
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment 6 Headphone connection, left
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
7 On/off, left
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Switching the system on/off
Press the left or right side of the button
Controls on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
respective page.
Rear entertainment and screens are switched
on/off.
After switching off the ignition, the system must
be switched on again.

Screens
1 Screen, left
2 Screen, right Adjusting
3 Center armrest, remote control Danger of burns when screen is folded out
4 CD/DVD player Do not reach behind the screen; other
wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The
back of the screen can become very hot.

Rear CD/DVD player

To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.


1 CD/DVD slot To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
2 Eject CD/DVD

221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Rear entertainment

Notes Menu navigation


Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter Press the but Function
face are installed. ton
When loading the rear seats and adjusting Operating concept as for the
the backrest of the front seat, fold in the front controller.
screens. Turn the wheel: highlight a
When using the through-loading system, menu item.
fold the screens down. Press the center knob: con
When cleaning the screen, follow the care firm the selection.
instructions, refer to page 307. Pressing arrow keys corre
sponds to moving controller:
switching between panels.
Remote control
Open the main menu.
In the center armrest in the rear
Displays the previous menu.

Opens the "Options" menu.

Changes the station, track or


chapter.
Press and hold the button:
fast forward/reverse.

Storage is possible in a horizontal position in the Adjusts the volume.


center armrest.
Switches the volume adjust
ment to the left/right.
With Professional rear enter
tainment: Toggles between
the screens.

The transmission time of the remote control is


limited by law. To execute a function again,
press or turn the required button again.

Replacing the batteries


No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.

222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Rear entertainment Entertainment

Radio
When the same radio source is selected in the
front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta
tion is played.
Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer
to page 192.

CD/multimedia
1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar CD/DVD
row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
When the same audio source (front CD/DVD
2. Insert batteries of the same type. player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se
3. Close the cover. lected in the front and rear, the same material is
played.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen
ter or to your service center. Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD,
refer to page 200.
Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 206.

Controls Music collection


Almost all functions can be operated in the same Music can only be stored and data can only be
manner as they are in the front. Special features exported and imported via the front CD/DVD
of operating the system in the rear are described player or the USB interface in the glove com
here. partment.
When music collections are selected in the front
Audio/video playback and rear, they are played back separately.
Operation is the same as for the front music col
Audio
lection, refer to page 207.
Audio can be played back via rear entertainment
from any source in the vehicle.
Tone
Operation is the same as for the front audio play Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The
back, refer to page 201. settings are made separately for the left and
right headphones.
Video
Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer
Video can be played back in the rear from the to page 190.
following sources:
DVD changer. Contacts
Rear CD/DVD player. Operation is the same as for the front contacts.
External device in rear.
If a video image is being played back in the rear,
Navigation
the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in Route planning can be performed separately on
the front. the left and right sides in the rear. Destination
guidance can only be started from the front.
Operation is the same as for the front video play
back, refer to page 202.

223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Rear entertainment

Operation is the same as for the front navigation, 3. Select the desired priority.
refer to page 172.

Suggesting a destination
A destination or trip can be sent to the front as
a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted,
stored, or declined in the front. This function is
not available with the following setting: "Driver
control".

1. Enter the destination.


2. "Suggest destination"
Priority options
BMW Assist
The driver has priority
Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the
The source selected via iDrive in the front is
front, refer to page 253.
output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can
be selected but not operated from the rear.
Adjusting
Other audio or video sources can be oper
The following settings are available: ated.
"Rear displays" Sound can only be output in the rear via
"Language/Units": language can be set headphones.
globally for all screens. The source that is to be displayed in the rear
"Tone" can be set via the iDrive in the front.
If necessary. "Climate". To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the
front:
Vehicle information
1. "CD/Multimedia" or"Radio"
Computer content can be displayed. Operation
2. Open "Options".
is only possible in the front.
3. "Select rear source"
Options menu 4. Select the desired audio or video source.
The split screen is not available and there is no
Integrated Owner's Manual. Same priority
Operation is the same as for the front menu op All audio and video sources can be operated
tions, refer to page 18. via the iDrive in the front and rear.
Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
Enabling is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
Enabling operation in the rear source selected last via the iDrive in the front
Only possible via the iDrive in the front. or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak
ers.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"

224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Rear entertainment Entertainment

The rear has priority Do not scratch the interface.


When the source selected in the rear is Fold up display screens for interference-free re
played on headphones, it can be selected ception.
but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am
audio or video sources can be operated. bient light can impair reception.
Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front Sound output on the headphones or
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. vehicle loudspeakers
Sound is output via loudspeakers: the Operation is only possible in the rear.
source selected in the rear is output on the
1. "Options" Open.
vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour
ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the 2. "Headphones" or"Loudspeakers"
front. With the following setting, sound output in the
rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers:
Switching off the rear DVD "Driver control".
Rear entertainment is switched off.
To switch rear entertainment back on: select
a different priority via the iDrive in the front External devices
and switch on the system, refer to
page 221. General information
External audio and video devices and digital
cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re
Headphones, vehicle fer to page 221, on the CD/DVD player. Opera
tion takes place on the external device.
loudspeakers
Due to the large number of different audio and
Connecting the headphones video devices available on the market, it cannot
be ensured that every audio and video device
Normal headphones will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to
page 221, on the rear CD/DVD player. Connecting an external device
1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch
Infrared headphones sockets on the CD/DVD player.
Connection via the infrared interface on the 2. Connect the external device to the RCA
lower edge of the screen. sockets.
Fitting infrared headphones and information on Video: yellow socket.
which headphones are supported can be ob Audio: white and red socket.
tained from your service center.
When using infrared headphones, ensure that Starting playback
the connection between the headphones and 1. "CD/Multimedia"
the infrared interface is not disrupted:
2. "External devices"
Do not place an obstacle between the inter
3. Select the or symbol.
face and headphones.
Do not cover the interface.

225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Entertainment Rear entertainment

Volume The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot


The volume of the sound output is dependent be adjusted.
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark Sound in the rear is output via the head
edly from the volume of the other audio sources, phones. Change priority if necessary and
it is advisable to adjust the volumes. output sound via vehicle speakers.

Adjusting the volume


The volume can only be adjusted if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume


is set and press the controller.

What to do if...
Only a black screen is visible.
Switch on the system.
There are no options available on the screen.
Replace remote control batteries.
With Professional rear seat entertainment
toggle between screens if necessary.
Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
Function is limited due to the selected pri
ority. Change priority.
The DVD does not play.
Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 202.

226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Rear entertainment Entertainment

227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Communication Telephone

Telephone
Vehicle equipment Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is Hold the mobile phone.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment Recharge the battery.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, Connect the mobile phone to an outside an
e. g., because of the selected optional equip tenna of the vehicle.
ment or country variant. This also applies for
This provides for better network reception
safety-related functions and systems.
and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones


At a glance
Details on which mobile phones and external
The concept devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
tooth.
via Bluetooth.
After these devices are paired once, they are Displaying the vehicle identification
recognized automatically when the ignition is number and software part number
switched on as soon as they are inside the ve
The vehicle identification number and software
hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons
part number are needed to determine which mo
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
Depending on their functionality, external devi preparation package. The software version of
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone the mobile phone may also be required.
or as an audio source.
1. "Telephone"
The telephone functions are described in the
following. Operation of the audio functions, refer 2. Open "Options".
to page 216. 3. "Bluetooth info"
Up to four external devices can be paired. 4. "Display system information"
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the These approved mobile phones with a certain
mobile phone provider or service provider. software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
Make entries only when traffic and road
phones or software versions.
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve this may lead to a malfunction.
hicle occupants and other road users. A software update can be performed if neces
sary.

230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

Notes Additional functions


At high temperatures, the charge function of the
mobile phone can be limited where appropriate Activating/deactivating the additional
and the functions are no longer executed. functions
When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, Activate the functions before pairing to be able
heed the operating manual of the mobile phone. to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit
able mobile phones, refer to page 230, that sup
port these functions.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile 1. "Telephone"
phone 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
3. "Options" Open.
General information
4. "Configure Bluetooth"
The following functions are available:
5. Select the desired additional function.
Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
"Additional telephone"
Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele
phone. "Office"

Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. "Bluetooth audio"

Use of an audio device as an audio source, 6. "OK"


refer to page 216. As long as an additional function is deactivated,
it cannot be assigned to a telephone.
Requirements
The mobile phone is suitable. Additional telephone
The mobile phone is ready for operation. A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone. The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 234. While a call is
Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
active on the additional telephone, incoming
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
Audio source
Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth Pairing and connecting cell phone
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing the mobile phone
The ignition is switched on.
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta
with all safety guidelines and regulations. tionary.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Bluetooth"

231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Telephone

Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con Symbol Function
trol Display.
Telephone.
1. "Telephone"
Additional telephone.
2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
3. "Add new phone" Audio source.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis
played. Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating nected with the vehicle at once.
instructions: e.g. search for or connect the If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
Bluetooth device or a new device. to page 233.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Following the initial pairing
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the mobile phone display. the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en
switched on.
ter the same Bluetooth passkey.
The phone book entries of the telephone
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
Four mobile phones can be paired.
Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone


7. Select the functions for which the mobile
If more than one mobile phone is detected by the
phone is to be used.
vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is
8. "OK" connected. If a different detected cell phone is
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone connected with the vehicle. A different mobile
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. phone can be connected by selecting it.
The functions supported by the mobile phone 1. "Telephone"
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
paired.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con
White symbol: the function is active.
nected.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone be
fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
when it is reconnected. If the mobile phone is
already connected, these functions are deacti
vated.

232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

Configuring cell phone Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on


Additional functions can be activated or deacti the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vated for paired and connected mobile phones. vehicle and on the mobile phone.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
1. "Telephone"
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
2. "Bluetooth (phone)" same passkey on the mobile phone and via
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config iDrive.
ured. Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
4. "Options" Open. the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
5. "Configure phone" Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
6. At least one function must be selected. to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con
nections with other devices if necessary.
"Telephone"
Is the audio connection activated? Deacti
"Additional telephone" vate the audio connection.
"Audio" Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
7. "OK" does it have only a limited remaining battery
If a function is assigned to a mobile phone, the life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
function will be deactivated where appropriate in adapter or via the charging cable.
for a mobile phone that is already connected and Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi
the mobile phone will be unpaired. ble that only one cell phone can be con
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
Swapping the telephone and additional cell phone from the vehicle and pair and con
telephone nect only one cell phone.
The function of the telephone and additional tel The mobile phone no longer reacts.
ephone can be swapped automatically. Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
1. "Telephone" Ambient temperatures too high or too low?
2. "Bluetooth (phone)" Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
The telephone functions are not available.
Unpairing the mobile phone Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
1. "Telephone" telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un
the mobile phone as a telephone.
paired.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
4. "Options" Open.
or they are incomplete.
5. "Remove phone from list"
Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
What to do if...
It is possible that only the phone book en
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
page 230.
transmitted.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con
nected.

233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Telephone

It may not be possible to display phone book 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
entries with special characters. "Loudspeak."
The number of phone book entries being 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
stored is too high. 6. To store: press the controller.
Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as Incoming call
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con
tact. Receiving calls
Is the mobile phone connected as an audio If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
source or additional telephone? The mobile book and is transmitted by the network, the
phone must be connected as a telephone. name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
The phone connection quality is poor. only the phone number is displayed.
The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the If more than one phone number is assigned to a
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending contact, only the name of the contact is dis
on the mobile phone. played.
Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in For calls on the additional telephone, the num
adapter or place it in the area of the center ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
console. network.
Adjust the volume of the microphone and An incoming call to the additional telephone is
loudspeakers separately. automatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
Accepting a call
the hotline or service center.
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad
justed. The settings can only be created during
Via the button on the steering wheel
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the Press the button.
telephone is unpaired.

1. "Settings"
Via the instrument cluster
2. "Tone"
"Accept"
3. "Volume settings"

234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

Rejecting a call 3. Select the digits individually.

Via iDrive
"Reject"

Via the instrument cluster


"Reject"

Ending a call

Via iDrive 4. Convert to letters as required.


"End call" Select the symbol.
Select the letters individually.
5. Select the symbol.
Select symbol to convert to numbers.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Only numbers can be spoken.

Letter/number assignment

Letter Number
Via the button on the steering wheel
ABC 2
Press the button.
DEF 3

GHI 4
Via the instrument cluster
JKL 5
"End call"
MNO 6
Entering a phone number
PQRS 7
Dialing a number TUV 8
When entering phone numbers, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers. WXYZ 9

Service numbers can be entered more easily,


e. g. 1-888-BMW-CARD. Calls with multiple participants

1. "Telephone" General information


2. "Dial number" You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.

235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Telephone

Accepting a call while speaking to Establishing a conference call


another party Two calls can be connected to a single tele
This function might have to be activated by the phone conference call.
service provider and the mobile phone must be
1. Establish two calls.
adjusted accordingly.
2. "Conference call"
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded where appropri When terminating a conference call, both calls
ate. are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put Switching the microphone to mute
on hold.
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call. 1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
1. "Telephone"
3. "Microphone mute"
2. "Active calls"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
3. "Hold"
is automatically reactivated:
The existing call is put on hold.
When a new connection is established.
When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing


DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac
cess to network services or for controlling devi
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from 1. "Telephone"


a list. 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
"Return" number".
The call on hold is resumed. 3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color. Phone book
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
Displays
"Swap calls"
The phone book accesses the contacts and
The call on hold is resumed. shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.

1. "Telephone"

236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

2. "Phone book" Redialing


A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts. General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed
last are displayed. The sorting order of the
phone numbers depends on the particular mo
bile phone.

Dialing the number via the instrument


cluster
This is possible when there is no active call.
Calling a contact
1. Press the button on the steering
Symbol Meaning wheel.

Contact with one stored phone num 2. Select the desired phone number.
ber. The connection is established.

Contact with more than one stored


Dialing a number via iDrive
phone number.
1. "Telephone"
Call not possible; mobile phone with 2. "Redial"
out reception or network, or Service
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num
Request is active.
ber if necessary.
The connection is established.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se
lect the required contact. The connection is es
Deleting a single entry or all entries
tablished.
The erasure of entries depends on the mobile
For contacts with more than one stored phone
phone.
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is established. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. "Options" Open.
Editing a contact
3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored Saving an entry in the contacts
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
1. Highlight the entry.
stored in the vehicle.
2. "Options" Open.
1. Highlight the contact.
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
2. Open "Options". contact"
3. "Edit entry" 4. Select the type of number: "Home",
The contact can be edited. "Business", "Mobile" or "Other"

237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Telephone

5. Complete the entries if necessary. Hands-free system


6. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
General information
Received calls Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
Displaying calls and vice versa.
The 20 calls that were last received are dis
played. From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
1. "Telephone"
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
2. "Received calls" range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.

From the hands-free system to the


Calling a number from the list mobile phone
Selecting an entry. Calls that are made on the hands-free system
The connection is established. can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Deleting a single entry or all entries Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis
The erasure of entries depends on the mobile play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
phone. instructions.

1. Highlight the entry.


2. "Options" Open. Voice operation
3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys
tem: operation, refer to page 22.
Saving an entry in the contacts
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
1. Highlight the entry.
system: depending on the equipment, the mo
2. "Options" Open. bile phone can be voice operated as described
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing below.
contact" The list of short commands in the Owner's
4. Select the type of number: "Home", Manual does not apply to this type of voice op
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" eration.
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".

238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

The concept The system says: 123 456 790. Continue?


The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel. 4. Dial
In many cases, the entries are accompanied The system says: Dialing number
by announcements or questions.
... Verbal instructions for voice operation. Calling

Using voice activation Dialing a phone number


1. Dial number
Activating the voice activation system 2. Say the phone number.
3. Dial
1. Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
Correcting the phone number
2. Say the command.
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
Terminating the voice activation
system Correct number
The command can be repeated as often as nec
Briefly press the button on the steering
essary.
wheel or Cancel.

Deleting a phone number


Possible commands Delete

Having possible commands read aloud All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Press the button. Help. Possible commands


Redialing
are announced.
Redial
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
Voice phone book
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
Using alternative commands may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The system often recognizes a number of dif
ferent commands to run a function; for instance: The entries must be entered using voice activa
tion and are separate from the memory in the
Dial name or Name
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Example: dialing a phone number Saving an entry


1. Briefly press the button on the 1. Save name
steering wheel. 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
2. Dial number duration of approx. 2 seconds.

The system says: Please say the number 3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
3. E.g., 123 456 790
4. Save

239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Telephone

Deleting an entry Environmental conditions


1. Delete name Say the commands, numbers, and letters
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. smoothly and with normal volume, empha
sis, and speed.
3. Confirm the query with Yes.
Always say commands in the language of
Deleting all entries the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
1. Delete phonebook
be changed in the Control Display.
The dialog for deleting the phone book is
Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun
opened.
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
2. Confirm the query with Yes.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
3. Confirm the query again with Yes. while speaking.

Reading and selecting entries


1. Read phonebook Snap-in adapter
The dialog for reading the phone book is
opened. General information
2. Say Dial number when the desired entry is Detailed information about snap-in adapter,
read. which supports the functions of the mobile
phone, available from the service center.
Selecting an entry
Notes
1. Dial name
At high temperatures, the charge function of the
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
mobile phone can be limited where appropriate
3. Confirm the query with Yes. and the functions are no longer executed.
When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle,
Adjusting the volume
heed the operating manual of the mobile phone.
Turn the knob during an announcement.
The volume remains constant even if the Installation position
volume of other audio sources is changed. In the center armrest.
The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use. Inserting the snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
Notes
Do not use the voice operation to initiate an
Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un
necessarily delay the establishment of a tele
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 298, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Telephone Communication

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar


row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en
gages.

Inserting the mobile phone


1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac
ing up in the direction of the electrical con
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar
row 2 until it engages.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Office

Office
Vehicle equipment The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 86, are correctly set on the Control
All standard, country-specific and optional Display and on the mobile phone to correctly
equipment that is offered in the model series is display appointments, for example.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
Office is activated, refer to page 231.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
Updating
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems. Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
At a glance
1. "Office"
General information 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes "Notes" or "Reminders"
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
3. "Options" Open.
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these 4. "Update data"
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
ards. vehicle.
Information about which mobile phones support
Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number Office information
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of
The number of unread messages and active
fice.
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
Contents are only displayed in full length when displayed.
the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Office"
The mobile phone has read-access only.
2. "Current office"
Do not use Office while driving
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf
fic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements
A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.

242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Office Communication

Contacts Dialing phone numbers


1. Select the desired contact.
Note 2. Select the phone number.
If equipped with full mobile phone preparation The connection is established.
package.
Editing a contact
At a glance
1. Select the desired contact.
Contacts can be created and edited. The con
2. "Edit contact"
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" 3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation


destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De
When contacts from the mobile phone are
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
used, the address may need to be matched
search is offered, refer to page 21.
to the navigation data contained in the vehi
A symbol indicates the storage location of the cle. In this case:
contacts:
Correct the address.
Symbol Storage location 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
In the vehicle; the address has An address that is to be used for destination
been checked as a destination. guidance must match the navigation data con
Mobile phone.

243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Office

tained in the vehicle. The address can be If necessary, "Accept address".


checked for this purpose. 9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address. Contact types
2. Open "Options". Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary. Symbol Meaning

If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of Home phone number.


it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
Business phone number.
changed on the mobile phone.
Mobile phone number.
New contact
Other phone number.
General information Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter Business address.
net address.

1. "Office"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
2. "Contacts"
top of the contact list.
3. "Options" Open.
1. "Home"
4. "New contact"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the


names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ 3. Open "Options".
ous entries: "Delete input fields" 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next last name"
to the entry field. Depending on how the contacts were stored on
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
may differ from the selected sorting order.
8. In the navigation system: enter address.
Only addresses contained in the navigation
Show contact pictures
data in the vehicle can be entered. This en
sures that destination guidance is possible Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
for all addresses. the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic

244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Office Communication

tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile Displaying messages


phone must support this function. 1. "Office"
1. "Office" 2. "Messages"
2. "Contacts" A symbol identifies the type of message.
3. "Options" Open. Symbol Message type
4. "Configure Bluetooth"
Text messages.
5. "Show images"
My Info
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de
activated. Message from the Concierge serv
ice.
Exporting/importing contacts
Message from BMW Info.
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 31. The contacts E-mail from mobile phone.
stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those
from the mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
Deleting contacts The message list can be filtered, when more
than one type of message exists.
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can 1. "Filter:"
not be deleted.

1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts".
6. If necessary. "Yes"

2. Select the type of message.


Messages "All"
All messages are displayed.
General information
"E-mail"
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
whether transmission from the mobile phone to displayed.
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- "Service message"
mails may not be supported by the service pro Only messages from the BMW Assist
vider, or the function may need to be enabled Concierge service, My Info and BMW
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, Info are displayed.
transmission may take several minutes. Mes
"Text message"
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi Only text messages from the mobile
tional telephone are not transmitted. phone are displayed.

245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Office

Deleting messages My Info


Messages from the Concierge service, My Info,
and BMW Info can be deleted. Starting destination guidance
Delete a message: 1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
1. "Office"
destination"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message. Dialing the number in the message
4. "Options" Open. Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
5. "Delete message" a message.

Delete all messages: 1. Select the desired message.

1. "Office" 2. "Call":

2. "Messages" If the message contains a number, the con


nection is established.
3. "Options" Open.
"Select phone number":
4. "Delete all messages" or"Delete service
messages" If the message contains more than one num
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message Message from the Concierge service
1. Select the desired message.
Starting destination guidance
2. Select the symbol. 1. Select the desired message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
Saving the sender in the contacts
destination"
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"

Using contact data


Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 249.
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text messages out loud, refer to Dialing the number in the message
page 250. Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Call":

246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Office Communication

If the message contains a number, the con Symbol Function


nection is established.
"Call"
"Select phone number":
If the message contains a number,
If the message contains more than one num
the connection is established.
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established. "Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
Storing an address one number, select the desired num
1. Select the desired message. ber from the list. The connection is
2. Open "Options". established.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
E-mail
Displaying additional information
1. Select the desired message. Displaying e-mails
2. "Further information" 1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
BMW Info 3. Select the desired e-mail.

General information Displaying e-mail contacts


Messages from BMW regarding service actions If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans
and news from BMW. mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
Displaying the message
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data


Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
Select the desired message.
selected, refer to page 249.
The following functions are available:

Symbol Function Deactivating the full display


When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
"Further information"
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
Detailed information about a mes result in charges.
sage is displayed. This does not re
sult in any costs. 1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"

247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Office

3. "Options" Open. Select the symbol.


4. "Fully download e-mails"
Using contact data
Only a part of the email from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle. Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
Reading the e-mail out loud selected, refer to page 249.

Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 250.


Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 250.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50
Tasks
days can be displayed.
Displaying the task list
1. "Office" Display tasks that are due within the next
2. "Calendar" 90 days.
The appointments on the current day are 1. "Office"
displayed.
2. "Tasks"

Selecting the calendar day


Sorting the task list
1. Select the date.
1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the desired day or date.


2. Select the sorting criterion:
"Next day"
"Priority (!)"*
"Date:"
"Subject"
"Previous day"
"Due date"
"Today"
Displaying the task
Display the appointment 1. Select the desired task.
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces
Turn the controller.
sary:
Select the symbol.
Turn the controller.

248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Office Communication

Using contact data Reminders


Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or Displaying reminders
selected, refer to page 249. Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
Reading the task out loud task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
Read the task out loud, refer to page 250.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
Notes 3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
Displaying notes displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Using contact data
At a glance
Displaying the note
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
1. Select the desired note.
messages, emails and notes can be stored or
selected.

Displaying contact or selecting phone


number
1. "Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
Select the contact to display contact de
tails.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
Select the phone number to establish a
Turn the controller.
connection directly.
Select the symbol.
Storing contact data
Using contact data
1. "Use contact data"
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
dress.
selected, refer to page 249.
3. "Options" Open.
Reading the note out loud 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
Read the note out loud, refer to page 250. contact"

249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Office

Reading out loud Depending on the number of stored ap


pointments, task notes, and messages in
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
tasks, and notes can be read out loud. vehicle.
1. Select the desired message, appointment, Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
task, or note. phone are displayed at the right time?
2. Select the symbol. The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set
The following options are available during read on the Control Display and mobile phone.
ing: The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
"Pause" E-mails are transmitted without an attach
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart ment.
reading. Entries are not displayed in full length.
"Back to beginning" Text were already transmitted from the mo
Start reading message again from the be bile phone in a shortened form.
ginning. Synchronization between the mobile phone
Select the symbol. and vehicle may take several minutes.

Skip a paragraph. The contact pictures are not being displayed?

Select the symbol. Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in


the vehicle.
Go back one paragraph.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.
Check the e-mail settings on the mobile
phone and adjust if necessary.
What to do if... If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to the hotline or service center.
page 230.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis
played.
The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor
rectly.
The Office function is deactivated.
The mobile phone is connected as an addi
tional phone.
Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.

250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Contacts Communication

Contacts
Vehicle equipment 4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Note
5. Enter the text, refer to page 21.
If not equipped with mobile phone complete
preparation package. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti
General information nation guidance is possible for all ad
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad dresses.
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav 7. If necessary, "Store".
igation.
8. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address


New contact
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
1. "Contacts" top of the contact list.
2. "New contact" 1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ Displaying contacts
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
1. "Contacts"

251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication Contacts

2. "My contacts" 2. Select the address.


3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"

Checking the address as a destination


An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De address.
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
2. "Options" Open.
search is offered, refer to page 21.
3. "Check as destination"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts: 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Symbol Storage location Selecting the sorting order of the


No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not names
been checked as a destination. Names can be displayed in a different order.

In the vehicle; the address has 1. "My contacts"


been checked as a destination. 2. "Options" Open.
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
Editing a contact last name"
1. Select the desired contact.
Exporting/importing contacts
2. "Edit contact"
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 31.

Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. "Options" Open.
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

3. Change the entries.


4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"

Selecting the contact as a navigation


destination
1. Select the desired contact.

252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
ConnectedDrive Communication

ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment Services offered
Emergency Request: when you press the
All standard, country-specific and optional
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As
equipment that is offered in the model series is
sist Response Center is established. The
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
with you and takes further steps to help you.
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for Automatic Collision Notification: under cer
safety-related functions and systems. tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As
sist Response Center then speaks with you
BMW Assist
and takes further steps to help you.
General information Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
BMW Assist provides you with certain services, Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as
e.g., transmission of the position data of your sistance is needed in the event of a break
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if down. If possible, the vehicle and position
an Emergency Request has been initiated. data are transmitted in the process.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi Customer Relations: connection with Cus
vidually agreed upon contract. tomer Relations for information on all as
pects of your vehicle.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
Response Center without your having to visit a status or required inspections are transmit
service center. After the BMW Assist system ted to your service center, either automati
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services cally before a service due date or when you
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be request a BMW service appointment.
reactivated by a service center after you sign a Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re
new contract. sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex
ample, the remote control is not available
Requirements and the vehicle needs to be opened.
The installed BMW Assist system is logged Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
in to a wireless communications network. that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
This network must be capable of transmit BMW Assist Response Center can deter
ting the services. mine its position.
To transmit position data, the vehicle must In addition to these services, the optional
be able to determine the current position. Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
The BMW Assist service contract was and information for route planning, traffic,
signed with your service center or with the and weather. A limited number of calls can
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling be made via the BMW Assist Response
must have been completed. Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
the mobile phone is not available or dis
BMW Assist is activated. charged.

253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication ConnectedDrive

Press the SOS button to contact the BMW can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con
Assist Response Center. cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Convenience Plan.

TeleService Starting the Concierge service


1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
General information 2. "Concierge"
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
3. "Start service"
The service varies by country.
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Connection costs may ensue. Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
Services may be restricted abroad. addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.

Requirements
BMW Assist is activated. Roadside Assistance
Wireless reception is available.
At a glance
The ignition is switched on.
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break
Use of TeleService
down.
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
vehicle.
a Check Control message, refer to page 80.
Even TeleService Customer Service is not ac
tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is Start Roadside Assistance without
still possible. BMW Assist or TeleServices
To continue using or to deactivate the services, 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
please contact your service partner or the BMW
2. "Roadside Assistance"
customer hotline.
The Roadside Assistance number is dis
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con
Concierge service
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels

254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
ConnectedDrive Communication

nection is established to Roadside Assis BMW Search


tance.
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun
Start Roadside Assistance with BMW tries.
Assist or TeleServices This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
General information
If the vehicle is equipped with TeleServices, Requirements
support is first offered through TeleService Di Subscription to the optional Convenience
agnosis and, where applicable, then through Plan.
TeleService Help. The date setting, refer to page 86, on the
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" Control Display is current.
2. "Roadside Assistance" The vehicle is located within wireless net
work coverage.
3. "Start service"
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"

TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are 3. If necessary, "OK".
transmitted automatically. The BMW Search home page is displayed.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab Operating BMW Search
lished. To start a search:
Turn the controller to highlight an element.
Press the controller to display an element.

255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication ConnectedDrive

Opening the start page


1. "Options" Open.
2. "Display start page"

Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or


TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
Loading a new page
3. "Start service"
1. "Options" Open.
2. "Update"
Service Request
Cancel
1. "Options" Open. At a glance
2. "Cancel loading" Sends information to your service partner to re
quest the arrangement of a service appoint
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur
Customer Relations ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on Starting a Service Request
all aspects of your vehicle. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
Calling Customer Relations 3. "Start service"

Vehicles not equipped with BMW


Assist or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec
tion is established to Customer Relations.

A Service Request can be started via a Check


Control message, refer to page 80.

256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
ConnectedDrive Communication

Automatic Service Request Neither personal data nor position data is trans
mitted.
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
Indicate when the last Teleservice Report was
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
transmitted:
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service 1. "Vehicle Info"
appointment can be arranged. 2. "Vehicle status"
To check when your service partner was noti 3. "Options" Open.
fied:
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Services status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"


2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"

3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"

Updating BMW Assist


Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist.
"Update BMW Assist"

TeleService Report
Data transfer
Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the
ongoing development of BMW products from During the updating of BMW services, display
your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec the status of the data transfer.
essary. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that 2. "Options" Open.
meet certain technical requirements and have a
3. "Data transfer"
valid Assist contract; this feature is free of
charge.

257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Communication ConnectedDrive

Apps Displaying status


Information about the currently available soft
At a glance ware applications can be displayed.
Certain software applications of a suitable cell 1. "ConnectedDrive"
phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
2. "BMW apps"
software applications are displayed on the Con
trol Display.
PlugIn
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis
played on the Control Display. Operation can be
Requirements
performed via iDrive.
The mobile phone is suitable.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.
The cell phone operating system supports
the software applications of Apps. 2. "ConnectedDrive"
Software applications are installed on the 3. "PlugIn"
cell phone and ready to use. 4. "Activate PlugIn"
Corresponding mobile wireless contract. 5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part controller and select, for example, a desired
of Apps. category or track.
Use only BMW approved software applica Press button to switch within the cell
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc phone functions to a higher level or back.
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available Press button twice to switch back to the
software applications and their installation can main menu.
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center. Notes
Create the entries. The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
Make entries only when traffic and road the Control Display depend on the range of
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu installed software applications on the cell
pants and other road users may be put in danger phone.
because of the distraction from driving. The data transmission of the software ap
For reasons of safety, some software applica plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station can last some time. Some software applica
ary. tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.

Use apps Some cell phones cannot simultaneously


use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys
1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in
tem.
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
If necessary, restart the software application
2. "ConnectedDrive"
on the cell phone after a phone conversa
3. Select the desired software application. tion.

258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
ConnectedDrive Communication

259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490


Mobility Refueling

Refueling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

All standard, country-specific and optional


equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

General information 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to


Refuel promptly the fuel filler flap.

Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;


otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.

Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap. Closing
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap


In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex
ample.

262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Refueling Mobility

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.


This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when


refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.

263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle equipment Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini
All standard, country-specific and optional
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine
equipment that is offered in the model series is
damage may occur.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip Use high-quality brands
ment or country variant. This also applies for Field experience has indicated significant differ
safety-related functions and systems. ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuel quality Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
taining metal must not be used. by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with void the applicable warranties with respect to
out metallic additives. defects in materials or workmanship.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso Minimum fuel grade
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic con The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
verter and other components. driveability, starting and stalling problems es
pecially under certain environmental conditions
Do not refuel with ethanol such as high ambient temperature and high al
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an titude.
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this Should you encounter driveability problems
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys which you suspect could be related to the fuel
tem. you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Required fuel
Detergent Gasoline.
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI Failure to comply with these recommendations
89 may result in unscheduled maintenance.
BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.

Gasoline with lower AKI


The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.

264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

Wheels and tires


Vehicle equipment Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
All standard, country-specific and optional
page 266, contains all pressure specifications
equipment that is offered in the model series is
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
This information can be obtained from your
ment or country variant. This also applies for
service center.
safety-related functions and systems.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Tire inflation pressure Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Maximum allowable driving speed.
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
sure influence the following: 160 km/h
The service life of the tires. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
Road safety. optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
Driving comfort. page 266, and adjust as necessary.

Checking the pressure


Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month These pressure values can also be found on the
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in pillar.
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, Maximum permissible speed
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other
accident. wise, tire damage and accidents may result.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure values up to 528i xDrive


100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
528i in bar/PSI

Specifications in
Tire size Pressure specifications
bar/PSI with cold
in bar/PSI
tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires 225/55 R 17 97 V M 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
+S A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M
225/55 R 17 97 V M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 +S RSC
+S A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
225/55 R 17 97 H M +S XL A/S RSC
+S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 +S XL A/S RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 96 Y
245/40 R 19 98 V M RSC
+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M
245/45 R 18 96 Y +S XL RSC
RSC
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 -
245/45 R 18 100 V RSC - 2.4 / 35
M+S XL RSC
H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 - RSC
RSC - 2.4 / 35 V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 -
H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38
RSC
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 - RSC
RSC - 2.6 / 38 V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 -
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
RSC
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 - XL RSC
XL RSC - 2.9 /42 Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/80 R 18 104
XL RSC
M 4.2 / 60
Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60

266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

535i 550i

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifica


in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/ Specifications in bar/


PSI with cold tires PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39


+S XL A/S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M 245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y 245/45 R 18 96 Y
RSC RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M 245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S RSC +S XL RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.5 / 36 -
+S XL RSC RSC - 2.5 / 36
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC - 2.4 / 35 RSC
H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.5 / 36 -
RSC RSC - 2.6 / 38
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC - 2.6 / 38 RSC
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.6 / 38 -
RSC XL RSC - 2.9 /42
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC - 2.9 /42 XL RSC
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 18 104 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

535i xDrive 550i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/ Specifications in


PSI with cold tires bar/PSI with cold
tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39


+S XL A/S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M 245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y 245/45 R 18 96 Y
RSC RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M 245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S RSC +S XL RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.6 / 38 -
+S XL RSC RSC - 2.6 / 38
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC - 2.4 / 35 RSC
H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.6 / 38 -
RSC RSC - 2.7 / 39
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC - 2.6 / 38 RSC
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.7 / 39 -
RSC XL RSC - 3.1 / 45
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.5 / 36 - H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 XL RSC
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of
XL RSC
T 135/80 R 18 104 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of 4.2 / 60
T 135/80 R 18 104 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60 Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant

268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

table on the following pages. Otherwise tire Tire size Pressure specifications
damage and accidents could occur. in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if
Tire inflation pressure values over the vehicle is equipped
100 mph/160 km/h with the high speed tun
ing feature
528i
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 -
Without high-speed tuning feature
XL RSC - 2.9 /42
Tire size Pressure specifications H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
in bar/PSI XL RSC
The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of
with the high speed tun T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
ing feature M 4.2 / 60

Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold With high-speed tuning feature
tires Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI

225/55 R 17 97 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 The values in ( ) apply if


+S A/S RSC the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun
225/55 R 17 97 H M
ing feature
+S RSC
Specifications in
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
bar/PSI with cold
M+S XL A/S RSC
tires
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
RSC M+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46


M+S XL RSC RSC

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 - 245/45 R 18 100 V


RSC M+S XL RSC
- 2.4 / 35
H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y V: 245/45 R 18 96 2.7 / 39 -
RSC Y RSC - 2.7 / 39
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 - H: 275/40 R 18 99
RSC Y RSC
- 2.6 / 38
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y V: 245/40 R 19 94 2.7 / 39 -
RSC Y RSC - 3.0 / 44
H: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC

269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

V: 245/35 R 20 95 2.7 / 39 - V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 -


Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 RSC - 2.4 / 35
H: 275/30 R 20 97 H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
Y XL RSC RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 -


T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h RSC - 2.6 / 38
M 4.2 / 60 H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
535i V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 -
Without high-speed tuning feature XL RSC - 2.9 /42
Tire size Pressure specifications H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
in bar/PSI XL RSC

The values in ( ) apply if Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of


the vehicle is equipped T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
with the high speed tun M 4.2 / 60
ing feature

Specifications in With high-speed tuning feature


psi/kilopascal with
Tire size Pressure specifications
cold tires
in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 the vehicle is equipped
M+S XL A/S RSC with the high speed tun
245/40 R 19 98 V M ing feature
+S XL A/S RSC Specifications in
245/45 R 18 96 Y psi/kilopascal with
RSC cold tires
225/55 R 17 97 H M
+S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
245/45 R 18 100 V RSC
M+S XL RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC

270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

V: 245/45 R 18 96 2.7 / 39 - Specifications in psi/


Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 kilopascal with cold
H: 275/40 R 18 99 tires
Y RSC

V: 245/40 R 19 94 2.7 / 39 - 245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44


Y RSC - 3.0 / 44 +S XL A/S RSC
H: 275/35 R 19 96 245/40 R 19 98 V M
Y RSC +S XL A/S RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 2.7 / 39 - 245/45 R 18 96 Y


Y XL RSC RSC
- 3.2 / 46
H: 275/30 R 20 97 245/45 R 18 100 V M
Y XL RSC +S XL RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.5 / 36 -


RSC - 2.5 / 36
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC

550i V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.5 / 36 -


RSC - 2.6 / 38
Without high-speed tuning feature
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.6 / 38 -
XL RSC - 2.9 /42
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC

With high-speed tuning feature

271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

Specifications in Specifications in
psi/kilopascal with bar/PSI with cold
cold tires tires

245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.9 /42 3.2 / 46 225/55 R 17 97 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42


RSC +S A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V 225/55 R 17 97 H M
M+S XL RSC +S RSC

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.9 /42 - 245/45 R 18 100 V


RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
- 2.9 /42
H: 275/40 R 18 99 245/40 R 19 98 V M
Y RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.9 /42 - RSC
RSC - 3.2 / 46 245/45 R 18 100 V
H: 275/35 R 19 96 M+S XL RSC
Y RSC
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 -
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.9 /42 - RSC
XL RSC - 2.4 / 35
- 3.2 / 46 H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
H: 275/30 R 20 97 RSC
Y XL RSC
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 -
RSC - 2.6 / 38
528i xDrive
H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
Without high-speed tuning feature
RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.4 / 35 -
XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires

225/55 R 17 97 H 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42


M+S RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 96 Y 245/40 R 19 98 V M
RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V 245/45 R 18 96 Y
M+S XL RSC RSC

V: 245/45 R 18 96 2.8 / 41 - 225/55 R 17 97 H M


Y RSC +S RSC
- 2.8 / 41
H: 275/40 R 18 99 245/45 R 18 100 V
Y RSC M+S XL RSC

V: 245/40 R 19 94 2.8 / 41 - V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 -


Y RSC RSC - 2.4 / 35
- 3.0 / 44
H: 275/35 R 19 96 H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
Y RSC RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 2.9 /42 - V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 -


Y XL RSC RSC - 2.6 / 38
- 3.3/ 48
H: 275/30 R 20 97 H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
Y XL RSC RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of F: 245/35 R 20 95 2.5 / 36 -


Y XL - 3.0 / 44
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 R: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL

535i xDrive Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires

245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42


RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 245/40 R 19 98 V M
M+S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V 245/45 R 18 96 Y
M+S XL RSC RSC

V: 245/45 R 18 96 2.8 / 41 - 225/55 R 17 97 H M


Y RSC +S RSC
- 2.8 / 41
H: 275/40 R 18 99 245/45 R 18 100 V
Y RSC M+S XL RSC

V: 245/40 R 19 94 2.8 / 41 - V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.4 / 35 -


Y RSC RSC - 2.4 / 35
- 3.0 / 44
H: 275/35 R 19 96 H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
Y RSC RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 2.9 /42 - V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.4 / 35 -


Y XL RSC RSC - 2.6 / 38
- 3.3 / 48
H: 275/30 R 20 97 H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
Y XL RSC RSC

Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.5 / 36 -


XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC

535i xDrive Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of


T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications


in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
The values in ( ) apply if The values in ( ) apply if
the vehicle is equipped the vehicle is equipped
with the high speed tun with the high speed tun
ing feature ing feature

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires

245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 245/45 R 18 100 V M 2.6 / 36 3.0 / 44


RSC +S XL A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 245/40 R 19 98 V M
M+S RSC +S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V 245/45 R 18 96 Y
M+S XL RSC RSC

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.8 / 41 - 245/45 R 18 100 V M


RSC +S XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
H: 275/40 R 18 99 V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.6 / 36 -
Y RSC RSC - 2.6 / 36
V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.8 / 41 - H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC RSC
- 3.0 / 44
H: 275/35 R 19 96 V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.6 / 36 -
Y RSC RSC - 2.7 / 39
V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.9 /42 - H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y
XL RSC RSC
- 3.3 / 48
H: 275/30 R 20 97 V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 2.7 / 39 -
Y XL RSC XL RSC - 3.1 / 45
Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature

550i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature

275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Speed letter


in bar/PSI T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
The values in ( ) apply if H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
the vehicle is equipped V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
with the high speed tun
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
ing feature
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire Identification Number
tires
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 xxx: tire size and tire design
RSC
3510: tire age
245/45 R 18 100 V
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
M+S XL RSC
U.S. Department of Transportation.
V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y 2.9 /42 -
RSC - 2.9 /42 Tire age
H: 275/40 R 18 99 DOT 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
Y RSC 35th week in 2010.

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y 2.9 /42 - Recommendation


RSC - 3.2 / 46 Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
H: 275/35 R 19 96 6 years.
Y RSC

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y 3.1 / 45 - Uniform Tire Quality Grading


XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 Quality grades can be found where applicable
H: 275/30 R 20 97 on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
Y XL RSC maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A

Tire identification marks DOT Quality Grades


Tire size Treadwear
255/50 R 19 103 Y Traction AA A B C
255: nominal width in mm Temperature A B C
50: aspect ratio in % All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
R: radial tire code
grades.
19: rim diameter in inches
103: load rating, not for ZR tires Treadwear
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

under controlled conditions on a specified gov combination, can cause heat buildup and pos
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded sible tire failure.
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
RSC Run-flat tires
and may depart significantly from the norm due Run-flat tires, refer to page 280, are labeled with
to variations in driving habits, service practices a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
and differences in road characteristics and cli marked on the sidewall.
mate.
M+S
Traction Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are weather performance than summer tires.
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled Tire tread
conditions on specified government test surfa
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may Summer tires
have poor traction performance. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based 0.12 in/3 mm.
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Winter tires
Temperature Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, 0.16 in/4 mm.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate less suitable for winter operation.
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus Minimum tread depth
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
The temperature grade for this tire is es circumference and have the legally required
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.

277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire damage Changing wheels and tires


General information Mounting
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob Information on mounting tires
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
Notes
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
the danger of subsequent damage and related
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
safety hazards.
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning Wheel and tire combination
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to Information on the correct wheel-tire combina
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro tained from your service center.
file tires. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
fects: DSC.
Unusual vibrations during driving. To maintain good handling and vehicle re
Unusual handling such as a strong tendency sponse, use only tires with a single tread con
to pull to the left or right. figuration from a single manufacturer.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over Following tire damage, have the original wheel
curbs, road damage, or similar things. and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
In case of tire damage
Approved wheels and tires
If there are indications of tire damage, re
duce your speed immediately and have the The manufacturer of your vehicle recom
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, mends that you use only wheels and tires that
there is the increased risk of an accident. have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop. For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
pants.
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
Repair of tire damage ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re
sult.

278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires


If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci
dents can occur.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires
With proper use, these tires meet the highest For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
standards for safety and handling. spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.

New tires Rotating wheels between axles


Due to technical factors associated with their The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac against swapping wheels between the front and
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe rear axles.
riod.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km. Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
Retreaded tires
as little exposure to light as possible.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
grease and fuels.
Retreaded tires Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres
Possibly substantial variations in the de sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.

Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 /+7 .
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform
ance as winter tires.

279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Wheels and tires

Run-flat tires Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.


Make sure that the snow chains are always suf
Label ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and Maximum speed with snow chains
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
gree. using snow chains.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event Snow chain detection
of a pressure loss.
The concept
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
When using snow chains, you should set
page 102.
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
Changing run-flat tires
The snow chain detection system supports you
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
by automatically showing the detected state on
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
the Control Display.
service center will be glad to advise you.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer
ing of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated
Snow chains automatically.
At speeds above the maximum allowable speed
Fine-link snow chains with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have axle steering is activated again automatically.
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended. Activating the status
Consult your service center for more informa 1. "Settings"
tion. 2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped Automatic detection
with the tires of the following size: If functioning properly:
225/55 R 17. Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
245/45 R 18. activated .

280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Wheels and tires Mobility

After you drive a short distance, a Check


Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is malfunc
tioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle


steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.

281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Engine compartment

Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
All standard, country-specific and optional ment or country variant. This also applies for
equipment that is offered in the model series is safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal


2 Jump-starting, negative terminal 5 Oil filler neck.
3 Washer fluid reservoir 6 Coolant reservoir

Hood If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide


lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
Opening the hood only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Working in the engine compartment
the danger of subsequent damage and related
Never attempt to perform any service or safety hazards.
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.

282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Engine compartment Mobility

Never reach into the engine compartment Closing the hood


Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot
parts.

1. Pull the lever.

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/


40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving


If you see any signs that the hood is not
2. Press the release handle and open the hood. completely closed while driving, pull over imme
diately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open


There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.

283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Engine oil

Engine oil
Vehicle equipment "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap
All standard, country-specific and optional
prox. 3 minutes.
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
e. g., because of the selected optional equip quart!"
ment or country variant. This also applies for Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
safety-related functions and systems.
"Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."

General information Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The engine oil consumption is dependent on the Too much engine oil
driving style and driving conditions. Have the vehicle checked immedi
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en
after refueling. gine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this


checked."
For the 530i, 535i, 550i, 525d, Note the newly calculated remaining mile
530d and 535d: check oil level age until the next oil service. Have the sys
tem checked as soon as possible.
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically and dis
played on the Control Display. For 520i and 528i: Check oil
level
Requirements
The engine must be running and warm after The concept
the vehicle has been driven for at least The oil level is monitored electronically during
6 miles/10 km. driving and shown on the Control Display.
The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
level roadway. check control message is displayed.

Displaying the oil level Displaying the oil level


1. "Vehicle Info" 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level" 3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages Possible messages


"Engine oil level OK" "Engine oil level OK"
"Measurement not possible at this time."

284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Engine oil Mobility

"Engine oil at minimum. Add 1 quart of Adding engine oil


engine oil!"
Within the next 125 miles/200 km, a maxi Filler neck
mum of 1 US quart/liter oil.
"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Immediately add 1 US quart/liter of oil.

Detailed measurement
Requirements:
Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
Only replenish the maximum oil amount of
Manual transmission: Shift lever in neutral 1 US quart/liter if the message is displayed in the
position clutch and gas pedal not de instrument cluster or the oil level has dropped to
pressed. just at the lower mark of the dipstick.
Automatic transmission: Selector lever in
transmission position N or P and gas pedal Protect children
not depressed. Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil
In order to perform a detailed measurement of dren and heed the warnings on the containers
the engine oil level: to prevent health risks.

1. "Vehicle Info" Do not add too much engine oil


2. "Vehicle status" When too much engine oil is added, im
3. "Measure engine oil level" mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
During the detailed measurement, the idle Oil types for refilling
speed is increased somewhat.
Duration: approx. 1 minute. Notes
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.

Viscosity grades for engine oils


When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine dam
age may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the


engine.

285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Engine oil

Some types of oils in some cases are not avail Coolant


able in all countries.
General information
Approved oil types
Danger of burns from hot engine
Specification Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30 cause burns.
BMW Longlife-01
Suitable additives
BMW Longlife-01 FE Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en
gine damage may occur. The additives are
Additional information about the approved harmful to your health.
types of oils can be requested from the service Coolant consists of water and additives.
center.
Not all commercially available additives are suit
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
Alternative oil types
suitable additives.
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following Coolant level
specification can be added:
If there is no Min and Max mark in the filler
Specification neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant
level checked if necessary by your service cen
API SM or superior grade specification
ter and add coolant as needed.

Note
Oil change Depending on the engine installation, the cool
An oil change should be carried out by your ant reservoir may be located on the opposite
service center only. side of the engine compartment.

Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres
sure to dissipate, and then open it.

286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Engine oil Mobility

3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between


the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to


the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi
nated as soon as possible.

Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.

287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Maintenance

Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat
All standard, country-specific and optional
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac
equipment that is offered in the model series is
count.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle, If this occurs, have a service center update the
e. g., because of the selected optional equip time-dependent maintenance procedures,
ment or country variant. This also applies for such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
safety-related functions and systems. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti
vated-charcoal filter.

BMW Maintenance System


Service and Warranty
The maintenance system directs you to re
quired maintenance measures and thereby sup
Information Booklet for US
ports you in maintaining road safety and the op models and Warranty and
erational reliability of the vehicle. Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor
Condition Based Service CBS mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. additional information on service requirements.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter Maintenance and repair should be performed by
mines the maintenance requirements. your service center. Make sure to have regular
The system makes it possible to adapt the maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi
amount of maintenance you need to your user cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
profile. for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Details on the service requirements, refer to Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en
page 82, can be displayed on the Control Dis tries are proof of regular maintenance.
play.

Service data in the remote control


Information on the required maintenance is con
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re
mote control that you used most recently.

288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Maintenance Mobility

Socket for OBD Onboard Data memory


Diagnosis Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop
ing vehicle functions further.
In addition, if you signed a service contract for
Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv
checking the primary components in the vehicle ices.
emissions.

Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos
sible.
Canadian model: warning light indi
cates the engine symbol.
The warning lamp flashes under certain cir
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.

Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.

289
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Replacing components

Replacing components
Vehicle equipment Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
All standard, country-specific and optional
page 71, the wiper arms.
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment 2. Fold up the wipers.
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po


sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a fold-


down cover in the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Wiper blade replacement


General information Lamp and bulb replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
General information
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
to vehicle safety.
not been installed; this may damage the wind
shield. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them
or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at the service center.

290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Replacing components Mobility

Danger of burns Headlamp glass


Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex
otherwise, there is the danger of getting ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
burned. driving with the light switched on, the conden
sation evaporates after a short time. The head
Working on the lighting system lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
When working on the lighting system, you If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with
should always switch off the lights affected to the light switched on, increasing humidity forms,
prevent short circuits. e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage center check this.
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer. Front lamps, bulb replacement
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on Halogen headlamps
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in At a glance
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs


Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
1 High beams
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base. 2 Parking lamps
3 Low beams
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 4 Turn signal
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
ements and other equipment. lateral turn signal lamp
These light-emitting diodes, which are related Follow the general instructions on lamps and
to conventional lasers, are officially designated bulbs, refer to page 290.
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
These lights are made using LED technology.
Do not remove the covers Contact your service center in the event of a
Do not remove the covers, and never stare malfunction.
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other
wise, irritation of the retina could result.

291
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Replacing components

Accessing the bulbs

Unscrew the cap, remove it, and change the


bulb.
Remove the screws and fold down the cap.

Low beams High beams

Follow the general instructions on lamps and Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 290. bulbs, refer to page 290.

The illustration shows the left side of the engine The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment. compartment.

55-watt bulb, H7 55-watt bulb, H7

1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart


ment.

Unscrew the cap, remove it, and change the


bulb.
2. Unscrew the cap and remove it.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 290.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
24-watt bulb, PY

292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Replacing components Mobility

3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. At a glance

4. Remove the bulb and replace it. 1 Corner-illuminating lamps


5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in 2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights
the reverse order. 3 Low beams/high beams
4 Turn signal
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
on and off frequently shortens their life. turn signal lamp

If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and
and continue the trip with great care. Comply bulbs, refer to page 290.
with local regulations. These lights are made using LED technology.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on Contact your service center in the event of a
xenon headlamps malfunction.
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in
Corner-illuminating lamps
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present Follow the general instructions on lamps and
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries bulbs, refer to page 290.
if work is carried out improperly. The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.

293
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Replacing components

55-watt bulb, H7 35-watt bulb, H8


1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart 1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.
ment.

2. Remove the screws.


2. Unscrew the cap and remove it.

3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.


3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. 4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

4. Remove the bulb and replace it.


5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.

Front fog lamps


Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 290. 1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamp

294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Replacing components Mobility

5 Outside brake lamp


6 Rear reflector

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and


license plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 290.
These lights are made using LED technology.
The illustration shows the position of the bulb in
Contact your service center in the event of a the installed bulb holder.
malfunction.

Lamps in the trunk lid

Access to the lamps


1. Remove the three screws using the screw
driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Squeeze the clips together and remove the bulb


holder.
Press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn coun
terclockwise and remove.

Reversing lamp
2. Fold away the cover. Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 290.
16-watt bulb, W16W

Inside brake lamp


Follow the general instructions on lamps and The illustration shows the position of the bulb in
bulbs, refer to page 290. the installed bulb holder.
21-watt bulb, H21W

295
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Replacing components

Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.

Squeeze the clips together and remove the bulb Battery replacement
holder. Use approved vehicle batteries only.
Pull out the bulb and replace it. Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa
Changing wheels
ble.
Notes After a battery replacement, have the battery
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare registered on the vehicle by your service center
tire. to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire available and that any Check Control messages
does not need to be changed immediately in the are no longer displayed.
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
Charging the battery
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center. In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals, refer to page 300, in the engine com
partment with the engine off.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
Time: update.
Date: update.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo
cated in the positions shown. Radio station: save again.
Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.

Disposing of old batteries


Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy
cling center.

296
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Replacing components Mobility

Maintain the battery in an upright position for Information on the fuse types and locations is
transport and storage. Secure the battery so found on a separate sheet.
that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse


types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,


arrow 2.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim.

297
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Mobility Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re
All standard, country-specific and optional
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
equipment that is offered in the model series is
conditions.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip Service contract
ment or country variant. This also applies for After your contract with BMW Assist has ex
safety-related functions and systems. pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
Hazard warning flashers After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request

The button is located in the center console.

Emergency Request
Requirements
Equipment version with full preparation 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
package mobile phone. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
An Emergency Request can be made, even button lights up.
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
hicle. was initiated.
BMW Assist is activated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
The radio ready state is switched on. until the voice connection has been estab
lished.
The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup The LED flashes if the connection to the
ported by BMW Assist. BMW Assist Response Center has been es
tablished.
The Assist system is functional.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW

298
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 879 - 09 11 490
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Assist Response Center contacts you and First aid kit


takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center. The first aid kit is located in the container on the
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist inside of the trunk lid.
Response Center cannot be heard on the Unscrew the wing nut to open.
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Assist Response Center may still be able to Check the expiration dates of the contents reg
hear you. ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Initiating an Emergency Request


automatically Roadside Assistance
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re
quest is automatically initiated immediately after Service availability
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button. clock in many countries. You can obtain assis
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.

Warning triangle Roadside Assistance


The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 254
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a